Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Created by,
1. Chrisshyaren (004201500004)
2. Kelvin (004201500015)
3. Rivi Sofia Ayu (004201500027)
4. Tantyo Edo Wicaksana (004201500033)
5. Lyu Guoqiang (004201500041)
PRESIDENT UNIVERSITY
INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING BATCH 2015
Jababeka Education Park, Ki Hajar Dewantara Street, Kota Jababeka,
West Cikarang, Bekasi 17550 – Indonesia
Phone (021) 8910 9762-6 - Fax (021) 8910 9768 - Email:
enrollment@president.ac.id - http://www.president.ac.id
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The Authors would like to express deepest gratitude to the Almighty God because
gives authors a lot of mercy and blessing which make authors can finish this report
as well.
Authors realized without the other helped, this report cannot be finished well. In
this occasion, authors would like to say thanks for some people who already
supported authors to complete this report.
Mrs. Anastasia Lidya Maukar, S.T., M.Sc., M.MT, as a lecture of
production planning and inventory control, the one who already guided
authors kindly so authors could to make this report.
Authors’ family which already give author support that make authors can
make this report completely.
Authors’ friends that cannot authors said the name one by one. The friends
which already support and help authors to do this report.
Authors recognized that this report still far away from perfect. Therefore, with all
humility, authors would like to say apologizes for any mistakes in this report.
Authors hope that the readers can give a good criticism and suggestion which can
make this report better than before. Hopefully this report can help the readers to
learn and know more about the forecasting, aggregate planning, capacity planning,
MRP and CRP.
Authors
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT ....................................................................................... i
TABLE OF CONTENTS ........................................................................................ ii
REPORT I ............................................................................................................ 1.1
REPORT II ........................................................................................................... 2.1
REPORT III ......................................................................................................... 3.1
REPORT IV ......................................................................................................... 4.1
REPORT V .......................................................................................................... 5.1
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER I ......................................................................................................... 1.3
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... 1.3
1.1 Background ........................................................................................... 1.3
1.2 Objectives .............................................................................................. 1.3
1.3 Tools and Equipment(s) ........................................................................ 1.4
1.4 Steps ........................................................................................................... 1.4
CHAPTER II ........................................................................................................ 1.5
LITERATURE STUDY ....................................................................................... 1.5
2.1 Principles of Forecasting ............................................................................ 1.5
2.2 Category of Forecasting ............................................................................. 1.5
2.3 Types of Forecasting Methods ................................................................... 1.7
2.3.1 Qualitative Forecasting Methods ............................................................ 1.7
2.3.2 Quantitative forecasting methods ............................................................ 1.7
2.3.2.1 Extrinsic Methods (Causal Approach) ................................................. 1.8
2.3.2.1.1 Simple Linear Regression ................................................................. 1.8
2.3.2.1.2 Multiple Linear Regressions ............................................................. 1.8
2.3.2.2 Intrinsic Methods (Time Series Approach) .......................................... 1.9
2.3.2.2.1 Last Period Demand (LPD) ............................................................. 1.10
2.3.2.2.2 Arithmetic Average (Average Methods) ......................................... 1.10
2.3.2.2.3 Single Moving Average (SMA) ...................................................... 1.10
2.3.2.2.5 Double Moving Average (DMA) .................................................... 1.11
2.3.2.2.6 Single Exponential Smoothing (SES) ............................................. 1.12
2.3.2.2.7 Double Exponential Smoothing (DES) – Browns Method ............. 1.12
2.3.2.2.8 Double Exponential Smoothing (DES) – Holt Method .................. 1.13
2.3.2.2.8 Triple Exponential Smoothing (TES) – Winter Method ................. 1.13
2.3.2.2.9 Regression Analysis ........................................................................ 1.13
2.4 Measurement of Forecasting Error........................................................... 1.14
2.4.1 Mean Squared Error (MSE) .................................................................. 1.14
2.4.2 Standard Error of Estimate (SEE) ......................................................... 1.15
2.4.3 Mean Absolute Percentage Error (MAPE) ........................................... 1.15
2.4.4 Mean Error (ME)................................................................................... 1.15
1.1
2.4.5 Mean Absolute Error (MAE) = Mean Absolute Deviation (MAD)...... 1.16
2.5 Validation of Forecasting Model ............................................................. 1.16
2.5.1 Verification Test.................................................................................... 1.16
2.5.2 Tracking Signal Test ............................................................................. 1.17
CHAPTER III .................................................................................................... 1.18
DATA COLLECTION....................................................................................... 1.18
CHAPTER IV .................................................................................................... 1.19
DATA ANALYSIS ............................................................................................ 1.19
4.1. Scatter Diagram for Demand .................................................................. 1.19
4.2. Forecasting Six Month Demand (Sept 2017 – Feb 2018) using Several
Methods .......................................................................................................... 1.20
4.2.1. Last Period Demand (LPD) ................................................................. 1.20
4.2.2. Arithmetic Average (Average Methods) .............................................. 1.28
4.2.3. Single Moving Average (SMA) ........................................................... 1.37
4.2.4. Weighted Moving Average (WMA) .................................................... 1.47
4.2.5. Double Moving Average (DMA) ......................................................... 1.57
4.2.6. Single Exponential Smoothing (SES) .................................................. 1.68
4.2.7. Double Exponential Smoothing (DES) – Brown Method.................... 1.79
4.2.8. Double Exponential Smoothing (DES) – Holt Method ....................... 1.95
4.2.9. Cyclic Method .................................................................................... 1.104
4.2.10. Linear Cyclic Method ...................................................................... 1.114
4.2.11. Linear Constant Method................................................................... 1.123
4.3. Best Method based on Calculation........................................................ 1.131
CHAPTER V.................................................................................................... 1.140
CONCLUSION ................................................................................................ 1.140
REFERENCE ................................................................................................... 1.141
1.2
CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background
Demand management has two activities, which are order service and forecasting.
Forecasting is the prediction, projection, or estimation of the occurrences of
uncertain future events or level of activity. In other words, forecasting is most often
used to predicting or estimating the future demand. Forecasting methods consist of
two major groups which are qualitative methods and quantitative methods.
The purpose from this production planning and inventory control assignment is to
forecast the demand in the future. The data come from the demand of Product X
over the last 20 months. The forecast data will provide the information to make the
better decision. In this assignment, the data will be forecast six-month demand from
September 2017 until February 2018. There are several forecasting methods to
forecast the data which are Last Period Demand (LPD), Arithmetic Average
(Average Methods), Moving Average consist of Single Moving Average (SMA),
Weighted Moving Average (WMA), Double Moving Average (DMA), Exponential
Smoothing consist of Single Exponential Smoothing (SES), Double Exponential
Smoothing (DES) with Brown methods and Holt methods and the last is Triple
Exponential Smoothing (TES).
This report will record all of the forecasting data from several method. Then, the
data will be analyzed and the conclusion can be taken to determine the best method
to predict the future data. The best method of forecasting is the more accurate
method.
1.2 Objectives
The objectives in this report are:
1.3
4. To determine the scatter diagram for the demand data.
5. To validate of each forecasting method.
6. To analyze the forecasting method and give the appropriate analysis based on
calculation.
1.4 Steps
There are several steps to determine the data, which are:
1. Draw the scatter diagram for the demand data over the last twenty months.
2. Determine the several forecasting methods to forecast six-month demand
which is from 2017, September until 2018, February.
3. Evaluate the methods in point using MAD, MSE, and MAPE.
4. Do the validation of each forecasting method using IIDN and verification
and tracking signal.
5. Analyze which one the best method.
6. The result was analyzed.
1.4
CHAPTER II
LITERATURE STUDY
Forecasting is the art and science of future events. This can be done by bringing
past data and placing it future to the form of a mathematical model. Forecasting is
the preliminary stage of decreased maturity growth.
According to Subagyo (2002), Forecasting is a forecast that has not happened yet.
In social science everything is uncertain, difficult to estimate precisely, therefore
used forecasting that aims for forecast or forecasting made can minimize the
influence of this uncertainty on the company.
1.5
1. Short-term forecasting: this forecast covers a period of up to 1 year.
Example: to plan a purchase
Medium and long term forecasting can be distinguished from short-term forecasting
by looking at three things:
Thus, as the time horizon increases, the accuracy of a person's prediction tends to
decrease. Sales forecasting should be updated regularly to maintain value and
integrity. Forecasting should always be reviewed and revised at the end of each
sales period.
One of the data sources that can be used for forecasting is the production record /
time series of the agency concerned.
1.6
2.3 Types of Forecasting Methods
Forecasting methods can be classified into two
groups: qualitative and quantitative.
1.7
2.3.2.1 Extrinsic Methods (Causal Approach)
Extrinsic methods also use internal or external factors that associated with
demand for the item, possibly in a causal relationship.
Y = b0 + b1 x (2-1)
Y = b0 + b1 x1+…+b1.xk (2-2)
1.8
2.3.2.2 Intrinsic Methods (Time Series Approach)
Time series analysis is related with the statistical analysis of past data to
forecast the future data. Time series are measured at specified intervals of
time. Time analysis series consist of:
1. Trends
There will be two types of trends which are positive trends and negative
trends. Trends are related with long-term persistent
movements/tendencies/changes in the data. It can be positive changes
(increases of the data) and the negative changes (decreases of the data).
2. Seasonal Component
Seasonal component are patterns of high and low demand that recur each
year. They may due weather, holiday such as Christmas and Easter, school
starting dates. Example product with seasonal patterns is ice cream, snow
tires, air conditioner, toys, text books and etc.
3. Cycles
Cycles is a periodic movement alternating between peak and valleys have
long been a subject of study by business economist. Cycles usually last
several years and so are normally not included in short term forecasting
models but do play a role in long-range forecasting.
4. Irregular Variations
Irregular Variations may be episodic or random. Episodic Variations are
attributable to nonrecurring causes such as a fire at a competitor’s plant, a
strike at a plant of a major customer, or a special promotion. Random
Variations, on the other hand, may be the result of many small factors, and
no single major cause can be assigned.
1.9
2.3.2.2.1 Last Period Demand (LPD)
The last period demand technique simply forecasts for the next period the
actual demand that occurred in the previous period.
Where, dt’ is the forecasted demand for period t and dt-1 is the actual demand
in the previous period (period t-1).
𝑑 +𝑑 +⋯+𝑑 ∑𝑛
𝑡= 𝑑𝑡
dt’ = = (2-4)
1.10
2.3.2.2.4 Weighted Moving Average (WMA)
A moving average is one of the most popular tools used by active traders to
measure momentum. The primary difference between the simple moving
average and the weighted moving average is the formula used to create
them.
1. Calculate the Single Moving Average from the data set and
denoted as St’
2. Calculate the second moving average namely moving
average from St’ and denoted as St”
3. Calculate the component (at) with the formula in the
following,
′ ′
= + + " = ′− " (2-7)
4. Calculate component of trend (bt) with the formula in the
following,
′
= −
+ − " (2-8)
1.11
2.3.2.2.6 Single Exponential Smoothing (SES)
This method is suitable for forecasting data with no trend or seasonal
pattern. The formula of single exponential smoothing is:
′
= . 𝑡− + − . 𝑡− ′ (2-10)
′
1. Use price
2. Use the average price of 4 to 5 first data
For the double exponential smoothing – Browns Method, the procedure is:
1.12
2.3.2.2.8 Double Exponential Smoothing (DES) – Holt Method
For the double exponential smoothing – Holt Method, the procedure is:
𝑋𝑡
= 𝐼𝑡−𝐿
+ − 𝑡− + 𝑡− (2-19)
= 𝑡 − 𝑡− + − 𝑡− (2-20)
𝑋𝑡
𝐼𝑡 = + (1- 𝐼𝑡− (2-21)
𝑡
𝑡+ = 𝑡 + 𝑡 * 𝐼𝑡− + (2-22)
is the coefficient random factors (0< <1), is the coefficient trend factors
(0< <1), is the coefficient seasonal factors (0< <1).
1.13
∑𝑛
𝑡= 𝑑𝑡
′= (2-23)
′
= + (2-24)
∑𝑛 𝑛 𝑛
𝑡= 𝑡.𝑑𝑡−∑𝑡= 𝑑𝑡 ∑𝑡= 𝑡
= 𝑛 𝑛
∑𝑡= 𝑡 − ∑𝑡= 𝑡
(2-25)
∑𝑛
𝑡= 𝑑𝑡 ∑𝑛
𝑡= 𝑡
= –b (2-26)
′ 𝜋 𝜋
𝑡 = + cos + sin (2-27)
𝜋 𝜋
∑𝑡= 𝑡 = . + ∑𝑡= cos + ∑𝑡= sin (2-28)
𝜋 𝜋 𝜋
∑𝑡= 𝑡 cos = ∑𝑡= cos + ∑𝑡= cos +
𝜋 𝜋
∑𝑡= sin cos (2-29)
𝜋 𝜋 𝜋 𝜋
∑𝑡= 𝑡 sin = ∑𝑡= sin + ∑𝑡= cos sin +
𝜋
∑𝑡= sin (2-30)
The total amount of time period in 1 cycle is denoted N and n is the amount
of time period.
1.14
∑𝑛 ′
𝑡= (𝑑𝑡 −𝑑𝑡 )
= (2-31)
′
Where 𝑡 is an actual demand for period t. is the forecasted demand at
period t and n is number of months.
∑𝑛
𝑡= 𝑑𝑡 −𝑑𝑡
′
=√ (2-32)
−𝑓
𝑑𝑡 −𝑑𝑡 ′
𝑃 𝑡 = × % (2-33)
𝑑𝑡
∑𝑛
𝑡= |𝑃 𝑡 |
𝐴𝑃 = (2-34)
∑𝑛
𝑖= 𝑑𝑡 −𝑑𝑡
′
= (2-35)
1.15
The result of Mean Error (ME) may be negative, so be careful to interpret
it.
∑𝑛 ′
𝑖= |𝑑𝑡 −𝑑𝑡 |
𝐴 / 𝐴 = (2-36)
∑𝑛
̅= 𝑡= 𝑡
(2-37)
−
′ ′
𝑡 =| − − 𝑡− − 𝑡− | (2-38)
= + . ̅̅̅̅̅ (2-39)
= − . ̅̅̅̅̅ (2-40)
1.16
Region A is an area outside ± 2/3 (2.66 MR) = ± 1.77 MR (above +1.77 MR
and below -1.77 MR). Area B is an area outside ± 1/3 (2.66 MR) = ± 0.89
MR (above +0.89 MR and below -0.89 MR). Region C is the area above or
below the midline.
∑𝑛 (𝑑𝑡 −𝑑𝑡 ′ )
Tracking Signal= 𝐴
= ∑𝑖=
𝑛 ′ (2-42)
𝑖= |𝑑𝑡−𝑑𝑡 |
𝑛
𝑑𝑡−𝑑𝑡 ′ 𝑑𝑡−𝑑𝑡 ′
Tracking Signal= 𝐴
=∑𝑛 ′ (2-43)
𝑖= |𝑑𝑡 −𝑑𝑡 |
𝑛
1.17
CHAPTER III
DATA COLLECTION
Tabel 3.1. below shows the demand data over the last 20 months of Product X.
1.18
CHAPTER IV
DATA ANALYSIS
1.19
Figure 4.2. Scatterplot of Demand vs Month with Connect Line
4.2. Forecasting Six Month Demand (Sept 2017 – Feb 2018) using Several
Methods
4.2.1. Last Period Demand (LPD)
Last Period Demand is a technique that forecast for the period the actual demand
that occurred in the previous period.
′
, = − = = 1620
The LPD calculation for six month demand from September 2017 until February
2018 are shown in the figure 4.3. Based on the figure, the forecast demand for
September 2017 until February 2018 is 1715. The value are same because the data
are constant.
1.20
Table 4.1 Last Period Forecast Demand
1.21
4.2.1.2. Evaluation of MAD, MSE, MAPE
There are three error measurement that are used to evaluate the forecasting method.
First error measurement is MAD. To find the value of MAD, the total value of |dt-
dt’| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
∑𝑡= | ′
− |
𝐴 = = = ,
1.22
Second error measurement is MSE. To find the value of MSE, the total value of (dt-
dt’)2 should be found out and calculate the average of it.
∑𝑡= ′
−
= = = ,
Third error measurement is MAPE. To find the value of MAPE, the total value of
|PEt| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
− ′
|𝑃 |= × %= × %= , %
∑𝑡= |𝑃 | , %
𝐴𝑃 = = = , %
4.2.1.3. Validation
After determining the value of MAD, MSE, and MAPE, next step, do validation
towards the forecasting method. There two kinds of validation, such as verification
and tracking signal, in this case using tracking signal – brown.
Verification
In order to show the control chart, there are several calculation. First, calculate the
value of (dt'-dt)-(d(t-1)'-d(t-1)) as a value of MRt. After that, find out the value of
MR using formula as belows.
∑𝑡=
= = ,
−
Find the lower and upper limit of control chart using formula as belows.
= , × , = ,
=− , × , =− ,
After the value of MRt, UCL, LCL, and CL are known, now plot the data in line
graph like in the figure.
1.23
Table 4.3 MR and Control Limit Calculation
-54
-34 -54 20 20
-74 -34 -40 40
159 -74 233 233
643 159 484 484
-342 643 -985 985
-245 -342 97 97
133 -245 378 378
-175 133 -308 308
-39 -175 136 136
108 -39 147 147
-244 108 -352 352
96 -244 340 340
-78 96 -174 174
-110 -78 -32 32
-30 -110 80 80
770 -30 800 800
-424 770 -1194 1194
-155 -424 269 269
MR 337.1666667
UCL 896.8633333
LCL -896.8633333
MRt UCL 2/3 UCL 1/3 UCL LCL 2/3 1/3 LCL CL
LCL
20 896.8633 597.9089 298.9544 -896.8633333 - - 0
597.909 298.9544444
40 896.8633 597.9089 298.9544 -896.8633333 - - 0
597.909 298.9544444
233 896.8633 597.9089 298.9544 -896.8633333 - - 0
597.909 298.9544444
484 896.8633 597.9089 298.9544 -896.8633333 - - 0
597.909 298.9544444
1.24
Table 4.4 MR and Control Limit Calculation (Continued)
1000
500
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
-500
-1000
-1500
1.25
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. So it is mean that this method is not good enough for predicting future
demand.
Other method to validate the method is by using the tracking signal brown check. To find out the value of tracking signal, there are
several values should be found out first. The calculation could be seen in the table below. To find out the value of MAD, using previous
one. The tracking signal could be found by using formula as belows.
∑𝑡= ′
−
𝑖 𝑖 = = = =
𝐴 𝐴
After the value of tracking signal in sample data already known, determine the control limit. The common control limit values is UCL
= 4, LCL = -4, and CL = 0. Plot the data using the line graph, the result is shown in the figure.
Period dt dt' dt-dt' RSFE |dt-dt'| Cum |dt-dt'| MAD Tracking UCL CL LCL
Cumulative Signal
1 1674 1620 54 54 54 54 54 1 4 0 -4
2 1708 1674 34 88 34 88 44 2 4 0 -4
3 1782 1708 74 162 74 162 54 3 4 0 -4
4 1623 1782 -159 3 159 321 80.25 0.037383178 4 0 -4
5 980 1623 -643 -640 643 964 192.8 -3.319502075 4 0 -4
6 1322 980 342 -298 342 1306 217.6667 -1.36906585 4 0 -4
1.26
Table 4.5 Tracking Signal - Brown Calculation (Continued)
1.27
LPD Tracking Signal - Brown Check
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
-2
-3
-4
-5
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is in of control. So it is mean that
this method pass the tracking signal test and can be used for production plan.
Based on figure 4.10, to determine the forecast demand in March 2016 it means
using two data before. The calculation are shown in below:
′
+
= =
To determine the forecast demand in April 2016, it means using three data before,
the formula is become;
′
+ +
= = .
The forecast demand for September 2017 until February 2018 is 1596.90. The value
are same because the data are constant. The data will be constant after calculate the
average actual demand each month before the period.
1.28
Table 4.6 Arithmatic Average Forecast Demand
There are three error measurement that are used to evaluate the forecasting method.
First error measurement is MAD. To find the value of MAD, the total value of |dt-
dt’| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
∑𝑡= | ′
− | ,
𝐴 = = = ,
1.29
Second error measurement is MSE. To find the value of MSE, the total value of (dt-
dt’)2 should be found out and calculate the average of it.
∑𝑡= ′
− ,
= = = ,
Third error measurement is MAPE. To find the value of MAPE, the total value of
|PEt| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
− ′
|𝑃 |= × %= × %= , %
∑𝑡= |𝑃 | , %
𝐴𝑃 = = = , %
1.30
Table 4.7 Evaluation of MAD, MSE, and MAPE (Continued)
SUM TOTAL
66.08 3337.033 1147028.95 241.98%
AVERAGE
185.3907 63723.83 13.44%
MAD MSE MAPE
4.2.2.3. Validation
After determining the value of MAD, MSE, and MAPE, next step, do validation
towards the forecasting method. There two kinds of validation, such as verification
and tracking signal, in this case using tracking signal – brown.
Verification
In order to show the control chart, there are several calculation. First, calculate the
value of (dt'-dt)-(d(t-1)'-d(t-1)) as a value of MRt. After that, find out the value of
MR using formula as belows.
∑𝑡=
= = ,
−
Find the lower and upper limit of control chart using formula as belows.
= , × , = ,
=− , × , =− ,
After the value of MRt, UCL, LCL, and CL are known, now plot the data in line
graph like in the figure
1.31
Table 4.8 MR and Control Limit Calculation
-61.00
-114.67 -61.00 -53.67 53.67
73.00 -114.67 187.67 187.67
701.40 73.00 628.40 628.40
242.50 701.40 -458.90 458.90
-37.14 242.50 -279.64 279.64
100.50 -37.14 137.64 137.64
-85.67 100.50 -186.17 186.17
-116.10 -85.67 -30.43 30.43
2.45 -116.10 118.55 118.55
-241.75 2.45 -244.20 244.20
-127.15 -241.75 114.60 114.60
-196.07 -127.15 -68.92 68.92
-293.00 -196.07 -96.93 96.93
-304.69 -293.00 -11.69 11.69
483.24 -304.69 787.92 787.92
32.39 483.24 -450.85 450.85
-124.32 32.39 -156.70 156.70
1.32
Table 4.8 MR and Control Limit Calculation (Continued)
MR 236.05
UCL 627.8979795
LCL -627.8979795
MRt UCL 2/3 UCL 1/3 UCL LCL 2/3 LCL 1/3 LCL CL
1.33
Table 4.9 MR and Control Limit Calculation (Continued)
1.34
Arithmetic Average Verification Test
1000.00
800.00
600.00
400.00
200.00
0.00
-200.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
-400.00
-600.00
-800.00
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. So it is mean that
this method is not good enough for predicting future demand.
Other method to validate the method is by using the tracking signal brown check.
To find out the value of tracking signal, there are several values should be found
out first. The calculation could be seen in the table below. To find out the value of
MAD, using previous one. The tracking signal could be found by using formula as
belows.
∑𝑡= ′
−
𝑖 𝑖 = = = =
𝐴 𝐴
After the value of tracking signal in sample data already known, determine the
control limit. The common control limit values is UCL = 4, LCL = -4, and CL =
0. Plot the data using the line graph, the result is shown in the figure.
1.35
Table 4.10. Verfication Test Calculation
Period dt dt' dt-dt' RSFE |dt-dt'| Cum |dt-dt'| MAD Tracking UCL CL LCL
Cumulative Signal
1 1708 1647.00 61.00 61 61.00 61 61 1.00 4 0 -4
2 1782 1667.33 114.67 175.67 114.67 175.67 87.83333 2.00 4 0 -4
3 1623 1696.00 -73.00 102.67 73.00 248.67 82.88889 1.24 4 0 -4
4 980 1681.40 -701.40 -598.73 701.40 950.07 237.5167 -2.52 4 0 -4
5 1322 1564.50 -242.50 -841.23 242.50 1192.57 238.5133 -3.53 4 0 -4
6 1567 1529.86 37.14 -804.09 37.14 1229.71 204.9516 -3.92 4 0 -4
7 1434 1534.50 -100.50 -904.59 100.50 1330.21 190.0299 -4.76 4 0 -4
8 1609 1523.33 85.67 -818.92 85.67 1415.88 176.9845 -4.63 4 0 -4
9 1648 1531.90 116.10 -702.82 116.10 1531.98 170.2196 -4.13 4 0 -4
10 1540 1542.45 -2.45 -705.28 2.45 1534.43 153.4431 -4.60 4 0 -4
11 1784 1542.25 241.75 -463.53 241.75 1776.18 161.471 -2.87 4 0 -4
12 1688 1560.85 127.15 -336.37 127.15 1903.33 158.6112 -2.12 4 0 -4
13 1766 1569.93 196.07 -140.30 196.07 2099.41 161.4928 -0.87 4 0 -4
14 1876 1583.00 293.00 152.70 293.00 2392.41 170.8861 0.89 4 0 -4
15 1906 1601.31 304.69 457.38 304.69 2697.09 179.8062 2.54 4 0 -4
16 1136 1619.24 -483.24 -25.85 483.24 3180.33 198.7706 -0.13 4 0 -4
17 1560 1592.39 -32.39 -58.24 32.39 3212.72 188.9834 -0.31 4 0 -4
18 1715 1590.68 124.32 66.08 124.32 3337.03 185.3907 0.36 4 0 -4
1.36
Arithmetic Average Tracking Signal - Brown Check
5.00
4.00
3.00
2.00
1.00
0.00
-1.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
-2.00
-3.00
-4.00
-5.00
-6.00
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. So it is mean that
this method is not good enough for predicting future demand.
Here, there are different kinds of number of time period included in moving average
(N), such as three, five, and seven. The smallest error will be chosen to be validated.
To find the value of forecasting demand as belows for N =3, so it is mean that
average of three demand before. If N = 5 , so it is mean that average of five demand
before, and so on.
′
+ +
= = ,
1.37
Table 4.11. SMA Forecast Demand
Month Demand (dt) Forecast Demand Absolute Forecast Demand Absolute Forecast Demand Absolute
(In Units) (dt') (In Units) Deviation (dt') (In Units) Deviation (dt') (In Units) Deviation
N=3 N=3 N=5 N=5 N =7 N=7
January-16 1620.00
February-16 1674.00
March-16 1708.00
April-16 1782.00 1667.33 114.67
May-16 1623.00 1721.33 98.33
June-16 980.00 1704.33 724.33 1681.40 701.4
July-16 1322.00 1461.67 139.67 1553.40 231.4
August-16 1567.00 1308.33 258.67 1483.00 84 1529.86 37.143
September-16 1434.00 1289.67 144.33 1454.80 20.8 1522.29 88.286
October-16 1609.00 1441.00 168.00 1385.20 223.8 1488.00 121.000
November-16 1648.00 1536.67 111.33 1382.40 265.6 1473.86 174.143
December-16 1540.00 1563.67 23.67 1516.00 24 1454.71 85.286
January-17 1784.00 1599.00 185.00 1559.60 224.4 1442.86 341.143
February-17 1688.00 1657.33 30.67 1603.00 85 1557.71 130.286
March-17 1766.00 1670.67 95.33 1653.80 112.2 1610.00 156.000
April-17 1876.00 1746.00 130.00 1685.20 190.8 1638.43 237.571
May-17 1906.00 1776.67 129.33 1730.80 175.2 1701.57 204.429
June-17 1136.00 1849.33 713.33 1804.00 668 1744.00 608.000
July-17 1560.00 1639.33 79.33 1674.40 114.4 1670.86 110.857
August-17 1715.00 1534.00 181.00 1648.80 66.2 1673.71 41.286
1.38
Table 4.11. SMA Forecast Demand (Continued)
There are three error measurement that are used to evaluate the forecasting method. First error measurement is MAD. To find the value
of MAD, the total value of |dt-dt’| should be found out and calculate the average of it. Here are example of N = 3.
∑𝑡= | ′
− |
𝐴 = = = ,
Second error measurement is MSE. To find the value of MSE, the total value of (dt-dt’)2 should be found out and calculate the average
of it.
∑𝑡= ′
− ,
= = = ,
Third error measurement is MAPE. To find the value of MAPE, the total value of |PEt| should be found out and calculate the average
of it.
1.39
− ′ ,
|𝑃 |= × %= × %= , %
∑𝑡= |𝑃 | , %
𝐴𝑃 = = = , %
For N=5 and N=7, the method is same using the formula of MAD, MSE, and
MAPE. After all of error values already calculated, the lowest value of error will be
choosen.
N=3
1.40
Table 4.13. Evaluation MAD, MSE, and MAPE (N=5)
N=5
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 PEt |PEt|
-701.40 701.4 491961.96 - 71.57%
71.57%
-231.40 231.4 53545.96 - 17.50%
17.50%
84.00 84 7056.00 5.36% 5.36%
-20.80 20.8 432.64 -1.45% 1.45%
223.80 223.8 50086.44 13.91% 13.91%
265.60 265.6 70543.36 16.12% 16.12%
24.00 24 576.00 1.56% 1.56%
224.40 224.4 50355.36 12.58% 12.58%
85.00 85 7225.00 5.04% 5.04%
112.20 112.2 12588.84 6.35% 6.35%
190.80 190.8 36404.64 10.17% 10.17%
175.20 175.2 30695.04 9.19% 9.19%
-668.00 668 446224.00 - 58.80%
58.80%
-114.40 114.4 13087.36 -7.33% 7.33%
66.20 66.2 4382.44 3.86% 3.86%
SUM TOTAL
-284.80 3187.2 1275165.04 240.80%
AVERAGE
212.48 85011.00 16.05%
MAD MSE MAPE
N=7
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 PEt |PEt|
37.14 37.14286 1379.59 2.37% 2.37%
-88.29 88.28571 7794.37 -6.16% 6.16%
121.00 121 14641.00 7.52% 7.52%
174.14 174.1429 30325.73 10.57% 10.57%
85.29 85.28571 7273.65 5.54% 5.54%
341.14 341.1429 116378.45 19.12% 19.12%
130.29 130.2857 16974.37 7.72% 7.72%
156.00 156 24336.00 8.83% 8.83%
237.57 237.5714 56440.18 12.66% 12.66%
1.41
Table 4.14. Evaluation MAD, MSE, and MAPE (N=7) (Continued)
From the table above, it showed that the lowest values of error is N=7. So, it is
better compared to others and will be continued to validation process.
4.2.3.3. Validation
After determining the value of MAD, MSE, and MAPE, next step, do validation
towards the forecasting method. There two kinds of validation, such as verification
and tracking signal, in this case using tracking signal – brown.
Verification
In order to show the control chart, there are several calculation. First, calculate the
value of (dt'-dt)-(d(t-1)'-d(t-1)) as a value of MRt. After that, find out the value of
MR using formula as belows.
∑𝑡=
= = ,
−
Find the lower and upper limit of control chart using formula as belows.
1.42
= , × , = ,
=− , × , =− ,
After the value of MRt, UCL, LCL, and CL are known, now plot the data in line
graph like in the figure.
MR 212.13
UCL 564.27
LCL -564.27
MRt UCL 2/3 UCL 1/3 UCL LCL 2/3 1/3 LCL CL
LCL
1.43
Table 4.17. MR and Control Limit Calculation (Continued)
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. So it is mean that
this method is not good enough for predicting future demand.
1.44
Tracking Signal Brown Check
Period dt dt' dt-dt' RSFE |dt- Cum |dt-dt'| MAD Tracking UCL CL LCL
Cumulative dt'| Signal
1 1567.0 1529.8 37.14 37.14 37.14 37.14 37.1428 1.00 4 0 -4
0 6 6
2 1434.0 1522.2 -88.29 -51.15 88.29 125.43 62.7142 -0.82 4 0 -4
0 9 9
3 1609.0 1488.0 121.00 69.85 121.0 246.43 82.1428 0.85 4 0 -4
0 0 0 6
4 1648.0 1473.8 174.14 244.00 174.1 420.57 105.142 2.32 4 0 -4
0 6 4 9
5 1540.0 1454.7 85.29 329.28 85.29 505.86 101.171 3.25 4 0 -4
0 1 4
6 1784.0 1442.8 341.14 670.43 341.1 847.00 141.166 4.75 4 0 -4
0 6 4 7
7 1688.0 1557.7 130.29 800.71 130.2 977.29 139.612 5.74 4 0 -4
0 1 9 2
8 1766.0 1610.0 156.00 956.71 156.0 1133.29 141.660 6.75 4 0 -4
0 0 0 7
9 1876.0 1638.4 237.57 1194.28 237.5 1370.86 152.317 7.84 4 0 -4
0 3 7 5
10 1906.0 1701.5 204.43 1398.71 204.4 1575.29 157.528 8.88 4 0 -4
0 7 3 6
11 1136.0 1744.0 -608.00 790.71 608.0 2183.29 198.480 3.98 4 0 -4
0 0 0 5
1.45
Table 4.18. Tracking Signal - Brown Calculation (Continued)
8.00
6.00
4.00
2.00
0.00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
-2.00
-4.00
-6.00
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. So it is mean that this method is not good enough for predicting future
demand.
1.46
4.2.4. Weighted Moving Average (WMA)
A moving average is one of the most popular tools used by active traders to measure
momentum. The primary difference between the simple moving average and the
weighted moving average is the formula used to create them.
Here, there are different kinds of number of time period included in weighted
moving average (N), such as three, five, and seven. The smallest error will be
chosen to be validated. To find the value of forecasting demand for N =3, using
formula as belows.
′
× 𝑡− + × 𝑡− + × 𝑡−
= =
∑
× + × + ×
=
To find the value of forecasting demand for N =5, using formula as belows.
′
× 𝑡− + × 𝑡− + × 𝑡− + × 𝑡− + × 𝑡−
= =
∑
× + × + × + × + ×
=
To find the value of forecasting demand for N =7, using formula as belows.
× 𝑡− + × 𝑡− + × 𝑡− + × 𝑡− + × 𝑡− + × 𝑡− + × 𝑡−
=
× + × + × + × + × + × + ×
=
= ,
1.47
Table 4.19. WMA Forecast Demand Calculation
Month Demand (dt) Forecast Demand Absolute Forecast Demand Absolute Forecast Demand Absolute
(In Units) (dt') (In Units) Deviation (dt') (In Units) Deviation (dt') (In Units) Deviation
N=3 N=3 N=5 N=5 N =7 N=7
January-16 1620
February-16 1674
March-16 1708
April-16 1782 1682 100.00
May-16 1623 1739.333333 116.33
June-16 980 1690.166667 710.17 1689 709.00
July-16 1322 1328 6.00 1455.20 133.20
August-16 1567 1258.166667 308.83 1378.07 188.93 1445.32 121.68
September-16 1434 1387.5 46.50 1406.07 27.93 1454.61 20.61
October-16 1609 1459.666667 149.33 1399.13 209.87 1432.54 176.46
November-16 1648 1543.666667 104.33 1473.73 174.27 1462.79 185.21
December-16 1540 1599.333333 59.33 1562.27 22.27 1506.32 33.68
January-17 1784 1587.5 196.50 1570.27 213.73 1527.64 256.36
February-17 1688 1680 8.00 1645.07 42.93 1612.93 75.07
March-17 1766 1695.333333 70.67 1673.40 92.60 1645.50 120.50
April-17 1876 1743 133.00 1710.80 165.20 1684.50 191.50
May-17 1906 1808 98.00 1774.40 131.60 1743.89 162.11
June-17 1136 1872.666667 736.67 1832.80 696.80 1795.00 659.00
July-17 1560 1516 44.00 1610.13 50.13 1643.00 83.00
August-17 1715 1476.333333 238.67 1572.00 143.00 1615.29 99.71
1.48
Table 4.19. WMA Forecast Demand Calculation (Continued)
There are three error measurement that are used to evaluate the forecasting method. First error measurement is MAD. To find the value
of MAD, the total value of |dt-dt’| should be found out and calculate the average of it. Here are example of N = 3.
∑𝑡= | ′
− | ,
𝐴 = = = ,
Second error measurement is MSE. To find the value of MSE, the total value of (dt-dt’)2 should be found out and calculate the average
of it.
∑𝑡= ′
− ,
= = = ,
Third error measurement is MAPE. To find the value of MAPE, the total value of |PEt| should be found out and calculate the average
of it.
1.49
− ′
|𝑃 |= × %= × %= , %
∑𝑡= |𝑃 | , %
𝐴𝑃 = = = , %
For N=5 and N=7, the method is same using the formula of MAD, MSE, and
MAPE. After all of error values already calculated, the lowest value of error will be
choosen.
N=3
1.50
Table 4.21. MAD, MSE, and MAPE Evaluation (N=5)
N=5
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 PEt |PEt|
-709.00 709 502681.00 - 72.35%
72.35%
-133.20 133.2 17742.24 - 10.08%
10.08%
188.93 188.9333 35695.80 12.06% 12.06%
27.93 27.93333 780.27 1.95% 1.95%
209.87 209.8667 44044.02 13.04% 13.04%
174.27 174.2667 30368.87 10.57% 10.57%
-22.27 22.26667 495.80 -1.45% 1.45%
213.73 213.7333 45681.94 11.98% 11.98%
42.93 42.93333 1843.27 2.54% 2.54%
92.60 92.6 8574.76 5.24% 5.24%
165.20 165.2 27291.04 8.81% 8.81%
131.60 131.6 17318.56 6.90% 6.90%
-696.80 696.8 485530.24 - 61.34%
61.34%
-50.13 50.13333 2513.35 -3.21% 3.21%
143.00 143 20449.00 8.34% 8.34%
SUM TOTAL
-221.33 3001.467 1241010.17 229.86%
AVERAGE
200.0978 82734.01 15.32%
MAD MSE MAPE
N=7
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 Pet |PEt|
121.68 121.6786 14805.67 7.77% 7.77%
-20.61 20.60714 424.65 -1.44% 1.44%
176.46 176.4643 31139.64 10.97% 10.97%
185.21 185.2143 34304.33 11.24% 11.24%
33.68 33.67857 1134.25 2.19% 2.19%
256.36 256.3571 65718.98 14.37% 14.37%
75.07 75.07143 5635.72 4.45% 4.45%
120.50 120.5 14520.25 6.82% 6.82%
191.50 191.5 36672.25 10.21% 10.21%
1.51
Table 4.22. MAD, MSE, and MAPE Evaluation (N=7) (Continued)
From the table above, it showed that the lowest values of error is N=7. So, it is
better compared to others and will be continued to validation process.
4.2.4.3. Validation
After determining the value of MAD, MSE, and MAPE, next step, do validation
towards the forecasting method. There two kinds of validation, such as verification
and tracking signal, in this case using tracking signal – brown.
Verification
In order to show the control chart, there are several calculation. First, calculate the
value of (dt'-dt)-(d(t-1)'-d(t-1)) as a value of MRt. After that, find out the value of
MR using formula as belows.
∑𝑡=
= = ,
−
Find the lower and upper limit of control chart using formula as belows.
= , × , = ,
1.52
=− , × , =− ,
After the value of MRt, UCL, LCL, and CL are known, now plot the data in line
graph like in the figure.
MR 219.10
UCL 582.82
LCL -582.82
MRt UCL 2/3 UCL 1/3 UCL LCL 2/3 1/3 LCL CL
LCL
1.53
Table 4.25. MR, UCL, and LCL Calculation (Contineud)
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. So it is mean that
this method is not good enough for predicting future demand.
Other method to validate the method is by using the tracking signal brown check.
To find out the value of tracking signal, there are several values should be found
out first. The calculation could be seen in the table below. To find out the value of
1.54
MAD, using previous one. The tracking signal could be found by using formula as belows.
∑𝑡= ′
− ,
𝑖 𝑖 = = = =
𝐴 𝐴 ,
After the value of tracking signal in sample data already known, determine the control limit. The common control limit values is UCL
= 4, LCL = -4, and CL = 0. Plot the data using the line graph, the result is shown in the figure.
Period dt dt' dt-dt' RSFE |dt-dt'| Cum |dt-dt'| MAD Tracking UCL CL LCL
Cumulative Signal
1 1567.00 1445.32 121.68 121.68 121.68 121.68 121.678 1.00 4 0 -4
6
2 1434.00 1454.61 -20.61 101.07 20.61 142.29 71.1428 1.42 4 0 -4
6
3 1609.00 1432.54 176.46 277.54 176.46 318.75 106.25 2.61 4 0 -4
4 1648.00 1462.79 185.21 462.75 185.21 503.96 125.991 3.67 4 0 -4
1
5 1540.00 1506.32 33.68 496.43 33.68 537.64 107.528 4.62 4 0 -4
6
6 1784.00 1527.64 256.36 752.79 256.36 794.00 132.333 5.69 4 0 -4
3
7 1688.00 1612.93 75.07 827.86 75.07 869.07 124.153 6.67 4 0 -4
1
8 1766.00 1645.50 120.50 948.36 120.50 989.57 123.696 7.67 4 0 -4
4
1.55
Table 4.26. Tracking Signal Calculation (Continued)
1.56
WMA Tracking SIgnal - Brown
12.00
10.00
8.00
6.00
4.00
2.00
0.00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
-2.00
-4.00
-6.00
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is in of control. So it is mean that
this method pass the tracking signal test and can be used for production plan.
Here, there are different kinds of number of time period (N) included in double
moving average, such as three, five, and seven. The smallest error will be chosen to
be validated. To find the value of forecasting demand for N =3, using formula as
belows.
′
+ +
= = ,
′
, + , + ,
= = ,
′
= − "=
′
= − " = ,
−
1.57
So, the forecast demand for next month is like formula below.
+ = + . = ,
January-16 1620.00
February-16 1674.00
March-16 1708.00 1667.33
April-16 1782.00 1721.33
May-16 1623.00 1704.33 1697.67 1711.00 6.67
June-16 980.00 1461.67 1629.11 1294.22 - 1717.67 737.67
167.44
July-16 1322.00 1308.33 1491.44 1125.22 - 1126.78 195.22
183.11
August-16 1567.00 1289.67 1353.22 1226.11 -63.56 942.11 624.89
September-16 1434.00 1441.00 1346.33 1535.67 94.67 1162.56 271.44
October-16 1609.00 1536.67 1422.44 1650.89 114.22 1630.33 21.33
November-16 1648.00 1563.67 1513.78 1613.56 49.89 1765.11 117.11
December-16 1540.00 1599.00 1566.44 1631.56 32.56 1663.44 123.44
January-17 1784.00 1657.33 1606.67 1708.00 50.67 1664.11 119.89
1.58
Table 4.27. DMA Forecast Demand (N=3) (Continued)
To find the value of forecasting demand for N =5 and N=7, the method is almost same with formula above. But the different in average
of previous demand based on number of period. For example, N=5, so average the values of previous 5 demand before, and the value
of St’ and St”calculated. After that, find the value of at and bt, and calculate forecast demand for next month.
1.59
Table 4.28. DMA Forecast Demand (N=5)
1681.40
1553.40
1483.00
1454.80
1385.20 1511.56 1258.840 -63.18
1382.40 1451.76 1313.040 -34.68 1195.660 413.34
1516.00 1444.28 1587.720 35.86 1278.360 369.64
1559.60 1459.60 1659.600 50.00 1623.580 83.58
1603.00 1489.24 1716.760 56.88 1709.600 74.4
1653.80 1542.96 1764.640 55.42 1773.640 85.64
1685.20 1603.52 1766.880 40.84 1820.060 54.06
1730.80 1646.48 1815.120 42.16 1807.720 68.28
1804.00 1695.36 1912.640 54.32 1857.280 48.72
1674.40 1709.64 1639.160 -17.62 1966.960 830.96
1648.80 1708.64 1588.960 -29.92 1621.540 61.54
1638.60 1699.32 1577.880 -30.36 1559.040 155.96
1547.520
1517.160
1486.800
1456.44
1426.08
1395.72
1.60
Table 4.29. DMA Forecast Demand (N=7)
1529.86
1522.29
1488.00
1473.86
1454.71
1442.86
1557.71 1495.61 1619.816 20.70068
1610.00 1507.06 1712.939 34.31293 1640.517 47.48
1638.43 1523.65 1753.204 38.2585 1747.252 18.75
1701.57 1554.16 1848.98 49.13605 1791.463 84.54
1744.00 1592.76 1895.245 50.41497 1898.116 7.88
1670.86 1623.63 1718.082 15.7415 1945.66 809.66
1673.71 1656.61 1690.816 5.70068 1733.823 173.82
1663.86 1671.78 1655.939 -2.63946 1696.517 18.48
1653.299
1650.66
1648.02
1645.381
1642.741
1640.102
There are three error measurement that are used to evaluate the forecasting method.
First error measurement is MAD. To find the value of MAD, the total value of |dt-
dt’| should be found out and calculate the average of it. Here are example of N = 3.
1.61
∑𝑡= | ′
− | ,
𝐴 = = = ,
Second error measurement is MSE. To find the value of MSE, the total value of (dt-
dt’)2 should be found out and calculate the average of it.
∑𝑡= ′
− ,
= = = ,
Third error measurement is MAPE. To find the value of MAPE, the total value of
|PEt| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
− ′ ,
|𝑃 |= × %= × %= , %
∑𝑡= |𝑃 | , %
𝐴𝑃 = = = , %
For N=5 and N=7, the method is same using the formula of MAD, MSE, and
MAPE. After all of error values already calculated, the lowest value of error will be
choosen.
N=3
1.62
Table 4.30. Evaluation MAD, MSE, and MAPE (N=3) (Continued)
N=5
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 PEt |PEt|
413.34 413.34 170849.96 25.69% 25.69%
369.64 369.64 136633.73 22.43% 22.43%
-83.58 83.58 6985.62 -5.43% 5.43%
74.40 74.4 5535.36 4.17% 4.17%
-85.64 85.64 7334.21 -5.07% 5.07%
-54.06 54.06 2922.48 -3.06% 3.06%
68.28 68.28 4662.16 3.64% 3.64%
48.72 48.72 2373.64 2.56% 2.56%
-830.96 830.96 690494.52 -73.15% 73.15%
-61.54 61.54 3787.17 -3.94% 3.94%
155.96 155.96 24323.52 9.09% 9.09%
SUM TOTAL
14.56 2246.12 1055902.37 158.23%
AVERAGE
204.1927 95991.12 14.38%
MAD MSE MAPE
1.63
Table 4.32. Evaluation MAD, MSE, and MAPE (N=7)
N=7
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 PEt |PEt|
47.48 47.48299 2254.63 2.81% 2.81%
18.75 18.7483 351.50 1.06% 1.06%
84.54 84.53741 7146.57 4.51% 4.51%
7.88 7.884354 62.16 0.41% 0.41%
-809.66 809.6599 655549.10 -71.27% 71.27%
-173.82 173.8231 30214.48 -11.14% 11.14%
18.48 18.48299 341.62 1.08% 1.08%
SUM TOTAL
-806.35 1160.619 695920.07 92.29%
AVERAGE
165.8027 99417.15 13.18%
MAD MSE MAPE
From the table 4.33 Comparation MAD,MSE and MAPE, shows that the lowest
values of error is N=7. So, it is better compared to others and will be continued to
validation process.
4.2.5.3. Validation
After determining the value of MAD, MSE, and MAPE, next step, do validation
towards the forecasting method. There two kinds of validation, such as verification
and tracking signal, in this case using tracking signal – brown.
1.64
Verification
In order to show the control chart, there are several calculation. First, calculate the
value of (dt'-dt)-(d(t-1)'-d(t-1)) as a value of MRt. After that, find out the value of
MR using formula as belows.
∑𝑡=
= = ,
−
Find the lower and upper limit of control chart using formula as belows.
= , × , = ,
=− , × , =− ,
After the value of MRt, UCL, LCL, and CL are known, now plot the data in line
graph like in the figure.
MR 302.81
UCL 805.48
LCL -805.48
1.65
Table 4.35. MR and Control Limit Calculation
MRt UCL 2/3 UCL 1/3 UCL LCL 2/3 1/3 LCL CL
LCL
MRt UCL 2/3 UCL 1/3 UCL LCL 2/3 LCL 1/3 LCL CL
From the figure 4.11, shows that the graph is out of control. So it is mean that this
method is not good enough for predicting future demand.
1.66
Tracking Signal Brown Check
Other method to validate the method is by using the tracking signal brown check. To find out the value of tracking signal, there are
several values should be found out first. The calculation could be seen in the table below. To find out the value of MAD, using previous
one. The tracking signal could be found by using formula as belows.
∑𝑡= ′
− ,
𝑖 𝑖 = = = =
𝐴 𝐴 ,
After the value of tracking signal in sample data already known, determine the control limit. The common control limit values is UCL
= 4, LCL = -4, and CL = 0. Plot the data using the line graph, the result is shown in the figure.
Period dt dt' dt-dt' RSFE |dt- Cum |dt-dt'| MAD Tracking UCL CL LCL
Cumulative dt'| Signal
1 1688.00 1640.52 47.48 47.48 47.48 47.48 47.48299 1.00 4 0 -4
2 1766.00 1747.25 18.75 66.23 18.75 66.23 33.11565 2.00 4 0 -4
3 1876.00 1791.46 84.54 150.77 84.54 150.77 50.25624 3.00 4 0 -4
4 1906.00 1898.12 7.88 158.65 7.88 158.65 39.66327 4.00 4 0 -4
5 1136.00 1945.66 -809.66 -651.01 809.66 968.31 193.6626 -3.36 4 0 -4
6 1560.00 1733.82 -173.82 -824.83 173.82 1142.14 190.356 -4.33 4 0 -4
7 1715.00 1696.52 18.48 -806.35 18.48 1160.62 165.8027 -4.86 4 0 -4
1.67
DMA Tracking Signal - Brown Check
5.00
4.00
3.00
2.00
1.00
0.00
-1.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-2.00
-3.00
-4.00
-5.00
-6.00
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. So it is mean that
this method is not good enough for predicting future demand.
Based on the figure below, the calculation of Single Exponential Smoothing (SES)
is shown. Single Exponential Smoothing (SES) calculation is using the value of ∝.
∝ is the coefficient of smoothing. Usually ∝ is between 0 and 1.
There are different kinds of ∝ which is 0.3, 0.5, and 0.7. Example the calculation
on February 2016 with ∝ = . , the calculation using formula as below.
′
= . + − . =
So, the forecasting for next month (February 2016) is 1620. And for the other ∝
will use the same calculation. The point is just change the value of ∝.
1.68
Table 4.37. SES Forecast Demand
January-16 1620
February-16 1674 1620 1620 1620
March-16 1708 1636.20 1647.00 1657.80
April-16 1782 1657.74 1677.50 1692.94
May-16 1623 1695.02 1729.75 1755.28
June-16 980 1673.41 1676.38 1662.68
July-16 1322 1465.39 1328.19 1184.81
August-16 1567 1422.37 1325.09 1280.84
September-16 1434 1465.76 1446.05 1481.15
October-16 1609 1456.23 1440.02 1448.15
November-16 1648 1502.06 1524.51 1560.74
December-16 1540 1545.84 1586.26 1621.82
January-17 1784 1544.09 1563.13 1564.55
February-17 1688 1616.06 1673.56 1718.16
March-17 1766 1637.64 1680.78 1697.05
April-17 1876 1676.15 1723.39 1745.31
May-17 1906 1736.11 1799.70 1836.79
June-17 1136 1787.07 1852.85 1885.24
July-17 1560 1591.75 1494.42 1360.77
August-17 1715 1582.23 1527.21 1500.23
September-17 1622.06 1621.11 1650.57
October-17 1622.06 1621.11
November-17 1622.06 1621.11
December-17 1622.06 1621.11
January-18 1622.06 1621.11
February-18 1622.06 1621.11
There are three error measurement that are used to evaluate the forecasting method.
The first method is MAD method. To find the value of MAD, the total value of |dt-
dt’| should be found out and calculate the average of it. Here are example of ∝ =
0.5.
1.69
∑𝑡= | ′
− | .
𝐴 = = = .
The second method to calculate the error is MSE. To find the value of MSE, the
total value of (dt-dt’)2 should be found out and calculate the average of it. The
calculation is using the value of ∝ = . .
∑𝑡= ′
− .
= = = .
The third method to find the error measurement is MAPE. To find the value of
MAPE, the total value of |PEt| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
The calculation is using the value of ∝ = . .
′
−
|𝑃 |= × %= × %= . %
∑𝑡= |𝑃 | , %
𝐴𝑃 = = = , %
For ∝=5 and ∝=7, the three methods calculation are same with the above
calculation. After all of error values already calculated, the lowest value of error
will be choosen.
α = 0.3
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 PEt |PEt|
1.70
Table 4.38. MAD, MSE, and MAPE Calculation (α = 0.3) (Continued)
SUM TOTAL
6.86 3265.361 1187220.07 242.25%
AVERAGE
171.8611 62485.27 12.75%
MAD MSE MAPE
α = 0.5
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 PEt |PEt|
54.00 54 2916.00 3.23% 3.23%
61.00 61 3721.00 3.57% 3.57%
104.50 104.5 10920.25 5.86% 5.86%
-106.75 106.75 11395.56 -6.58% 6.58%
-696.38 696.375 484938.14 - 71.06%
71.06%
-6.19 6.1875 38.29 -0.47% 0.47%
241.91 241.9063 58518.63 15.44% 15.44%
-12.05 12.04688 145.13 -0.84% 0.84%
168.98 168.9766 28553.08 10.50% 10.50%
123.49 123.4883 15249.36 7.49% 7.49%
-46.26 46.25586 2139.60 -3.00% 3.00%
220.87 220.8721 48784.47 12.38% 12.38%
14.44 14.43604 208.40 0.86% 0.86%
85.22 85.21802 7262.11 4.83% 4.83%
152.61 152.609 23289.51 8.13% 8.13%
106.30 106.3045 11300.65 5.58% 5.58%
-716.85 716.8477 513870.69 - 63.10%
63.10%
65.58 65.57613 4300.23 4.20% 4.20%
1.71
Table 4.39. MAD, MSE, and MAPE Calculation (α = 0.5) (Continued)
SUM TOTAL
2.21 3171.138 1262815.45 238.07%
AVERAGE
166.902 66463.97 12.53%
MAD MSE MAPE
α = 0.7
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 PEt |PEt|
54.00 54 2916.00 3.23% 3.23%
50.20 50.2 2520.04 2.94% 2.94%
89.06 89.06 7931.68 5.00% 5.00%
-132.28 132.282 17498.53 -8.15% 8.15%
-682.68 682.6846 466058.26 - 69.66%
69.66%
137.19 137.1946 18822.36 10.38% 10.38%
286.16 286.1584 81886.62 18.26% 18.26%
-47.15 47.15248 2223.36 -3.29% 3.29%
160.85 160.8543 25874.09 10.00% 10.00%
87.26 87.25628 7613.66 5.29% 5.29%
-81.82 81.82312 6695.02 -5.31% 5.31%
219.45 219.4531 48159.65 12.30% 12.30%
-30.16 30.16408 909.87 -1.79% 1.79%
68.95 68.95078 4754.21 3.90% 3.90%
130.69 130.6852 17078.63 6.97% 6.97%
69.21 69.20557 4789.41 3.63% 3.63%
-749.24 749.2383 561358.07 - 65.95%
65.95%
199.23 199.2285 39692.00 12.77% 12.77%
214.77 214.7686 46125.53 12.52% 12.52%
SUM TOTAL
43.67 3490.36 1362907.00 261.35%
AVERAGE
183.7031 71731.95 13.76%
MAD MSE MAPE
1.72
Table 4.41. MAD, MSE, and MAPE Comparation
Based on the figure above, the alpha (∝ that have the lowest values of error is ∝
= . . Because of it has the lowest error than the other two alpha (∝ , so it is the
best for this method and then it is used to the validation process now.
4.2.6.3. Validation
After determining the value of MAD, MSE, and MAPE, the next step is do
validation towards the forecasting method. Validation method consist of two, such
as verification and tracking signal. In this case, the calculation is using tracking
signal – brown.
Verification
In order to show the control chart, there are several calculation. First, calculate the
value of (dt'-dt)-(d(t-1)'-d(t-1)) as a value of MRt. After that, to find out the value
of MR using formula based on the previous chapter.
∑𝑡=
= = .
−
Find the lower and upper limit of control chart using formula as belows.
= . × . = .
=− . × . =− .
=
After the value of MRt, UCL, LCL, and CL are known, now plot the data in line
graph like in the figure.
1.73
Table 4.42. MR and Control Limit Calculation
MR 275.15
UCL 731.8948749
LCL -731.8948749
1.74
Table 4.43. MR and Control Limit Calculation
1.75
Figure 4.13. SES Verification Test
Based on the figure 4. , it showed that the graph is out of control. Thus, it is mean
that this method is not good enough for predicting future demand.
The other method to validate the method is by using the tracking signal brown
check. To find out the value of tracking signal, there are several values should be
found out first. The calculation could be seen in the table below. To find out the
value of MAD, using previous one. The tracking signal could be found by using
formula as belows.
∑𝑡= ′
−
𝑖 𝑖 = = = =
𝐴 𝐴
After the value of tracking signal in sample data already known, determine the
control limit. The common control limit values is UCL = 4, LCL = -4, and CL = 0.
Plot the data using the line graph, the result is shown in the figure
1.76
Table 4.44. Tracking Signal Calculation
Period dt dt' dt-dt' RSFE |dt-dt'| Cum |dt- MAD Tracking UCL CL LCL
Cumulativ dt'| Signal
e
1 1674.00 1620.00 54.00 54.00 54.00 54.00 54 1.00 4 0 -4
2 1708.00 1647.00 61.00 115.00 61.00 115.00 57.5 2.00 4 0 -4
3 1782.00 1677.50 104.50 219.50 104.50 219.50 73.1666 3.00 4 0 -4
7
4 1623.00 1729.75 -106.75 112.75 106.75 326.25 81.5625 1.38 4 0 -4
5 980.00 1676.38 -696.38 -583.63 696.38 1022.63 204.525 -2.85 4 0 -4
6 1322.00 1328.19 -6.19 -589.81 6.19 1028.81 171.468 -3.44 4 0 -4
8
7 1567.00 1325.09 241.91 -347.91 241.91 1270.72 181.531 -1.92 4 0 -4
3
8 1434.00 1446.05 -12.05 -359.95 12.05 1282.77 160.345 -2.24 4 0 -4
7
9 1609.00 1440.02 168.98 -190.98 168.98 1451.74 161.304 -1.18 4 0 -4
7
10 1648.00 1524.51 123.49 -67.49 123.49 1575.23 157.523 -0.43 4 0 -4
11 1540.00 1586.26 -46.26 -113.74 46.26 1621.49 147.407 -0.77 4 0 -4
8
12 1784.00 1563.13 220.87 107.13 220.87 1842.36 153.529 0.70 4 0 -4
9
13 1688.00 1673.56 14.44 121.56 14.44 1856.79 142.830 0.85 4 0 -4
3
14 1766.00 1680.78 85.22 206.78 85.22 1942.01 138.715 1.49 4 0 -4
2
1.77
Table 4.44. Tracking Signal Calculation (Continued)
1.78
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is in of control. So it is mean that
this method pass the tracking signal test and can be used for production plan.
Here, there are different kinds of number of time period included in coefficient
factor (α), such as 0.3, 0.5, and 0.7. The smallest error will be chosen to be validated.
In order to find the value of forecasting demand for α = 0.3, first calculate the single-
smoothed series by using this formula below:
𝑡′ = 𝑡 + − 𝑡− ′
′
= . + − .
′
= .
In this method, the first single-smoothed series, it’s assumed to be same like the
demand. The first double-smoothed series also assumed to be same like the demand.
So, the second period’s single-smoothed series and double-smoothed series and the
rest period can be calculated. After the single-smoothed series is calculated, then
the double-smoothed series can be calculated by using this formula below:
𝑡 ′′ = 𝑡′ + − 𝑡− ′′
′′
= . . + − .
′′
= .
1.79
After that, the rest period’s also calculated by using these formula in order to find
each at and bt (the coefficient to forecast the demand). The coefficient at and bt can
be calculated by using these formula:
′
𝑡 = 𝑡 − 𝑡 ′′
′ ′′
𝑡 = 𝑡 − 𝑡
−
1.80
= . − . = .
.
= . − . = .
− .
The coefficient of period 2 is used to forecast the demand of period 3 like this:
𝑡+ = 𝑡 + 𝑡
+ = . + . = .
The result of forecasting by using DES-Browns method with α= 0.3 can be seen in the table below:
1.81
Table 4.45. DES Browns Forecast Demand (α =0.3) (Continued)
1.82
To find the value of forecasting demand for α = 0.5 by using the formula like the
previous forecasting that used α = 0.3. So, first calculation is about to find the
single-smoothed series like on the below:
𝑡′ = 𝑡 + − 𝑡− ′
′
= . + − .
′
= .
It’s like the first forecasting before, the first single-smoothed series is assumed to
be same like the demand. The first double-smoothed series also assumed to be same
like the demand. So, the second period’s single-smoothed series and double-
smoothed series and the rest period can be calculated. After the single-smoothed
series is calculated, then the double-smoothed series can be calculated by using this
formula below:
𝑡 ′′ = 𝑡′ + − 𝑡− ′′
′′
= . . + − .
′′
= .
After that, the rest period’s also calculated by using these formula in order to find
each at and bt (the coefficient to forecast the demand). The coefficient at and bt can
be calculated by using these formula:
′
𝑡 = 𝑡 − 𝑡 ′′
′ ′′
𝑡 = 𝑡 − 𝑡
−
= . − . = .
.
= . − . = .
− .
The coefficient of period 2 is used to forecast the demand of period 3 like this:
1.83
𝑡+ = 𝑡 + 𝑡
+ = . + . = .
The result of forecasting by using DES-Browns method with α= 0.5 can be seen in
the table below:
α = 0.5
St' St" at bt Forecast Demand (Dt')
1620 1620
1647.00 1633.50 1660.50 13.50
1677.50 1655.50 1699.50 22.00 1674.00
1729.75 1692.63 1766.88 37.13 1721.50
1676.38 1684.50 1668.25 -8.13 1804.00
1328.19 1506.34 1150.03 -178.16 1660.13
1325.09 1415.72 1234.47 -90.63 971.88
1446.05 1430.88 1461.21 15.16 1143.84
1440.02 1435.45 1444.59 4.57 1476.38
1524.51 1479.98 1569.04 44.53 1449.16
1586.26 1533.12 1639.39 53.14 1613.57
1563.13 1548.12 1578.13 15.00 1692.53
1673.56 1610.84 1736.28 62.72 1593.14
1680.78 1645.81 1715.75 34.97 1799.00
1723.39 1684.60 1762.18 38.79 1750.72
1799.70 1742.15 1857.24 57.55 1800.97
1852.85 1797.50 1908.20 55.35 1914.79
1494.42 1645.96 1342.89 -151.54 1963.55
1527.21 1586.59 1467.84 -59.37 1191.35
1621.11 1603.85 1638.37 17.26 1408.46
1655.63
1672.89
1690.14
1707.40
1724.66
1741.92
1.84
To find the value of forecasting demand for α = 0.7 by using the formula like the
previous forecasting that used α = 0.5. So, first calculation is about to find the
single-smoothed series like on the below:
𝑡′ = 𝑡 + − 𝑡− ′
′
= . + − .
′
= .
It’s like the first forecasting before, the first single-smoothed series is assumed to
be same like the demand. The first double-smoothed series also assumed to be same
like the demand. So, the second period’s single-smoothed series and double-
smoothed series and the rest period can be calculated. After the single-smoothed
series is calculated, then the double-smoothed series can be calculated by using this
formula below:
𝑡 ′′ = 𝑡′ + − 𝑡− ′′
′′
= . . + − .
′′
= .
After that, the rest period’s also calculated by using these formula in order to find
each at and bt (the coefficient to forecast the demand). The coefficient at and bt can
be calculated by using these formula:
′
𝑡 = 𝑡 − 𝑡 ′′
′ ′′
𝑡 = 𝑡 − 𝑡
−
= . − . = .
.
= . − . = .
− .
The coefficient of period 2 is used to forecast the demand of period 3 like this:
1.85
𝑡+ = 𝑡 + 𝑡
+ = . + . = .
The result of forecasting by using DES-Browns method with α= 0.7 can be seen in
the table 4.47.
α = 0.7
St' St" at bt Forecast Demand (Dt')
1620 1620
1657.80 1646.46 1669.14 7.56
1692.94 1679.00 1706.88 9.30 1676.70
1755.28 1732.40 1778.17 15.26 1716.18
1662.68 1683.60 1641.77 -13.94 1793.43
1184.81 1334.44 1035.17 -99.76 1627.83
1280.84 1296.92 1264.76 -10.72 935.41
1481.15 1425.88 1536.42 36.85 1254.04
1448.15 1441.47 1454.82 4.45 1573.27
1560.74 1524.96 1596.53 23.86 1459.28
1621.82 1592.76 1650.88 19.37 1620.38
1564.55 1573.01 1556.08 -5.64 1670.25
1718.16 1674.62 1761.71 29.03 1550.44
1697.05 1690.32 1703.78 4.49 1790.74
1745.31 1728.82 1761.81 11.00 1708.26
1836.79 1804.40 1869.19 21.60 1772.81
1885.24 1860.99 1909.49 16.17 1890.78
1360.77 1510.84 1210.71 -100.04 1925.66
1500.23 1503.41 1497.05 -2.12 1110.66
1650.57 1606.42 1694.72 29.43 1494.93
1724.15
1753.58
1783.01
1812.44
1841.87
1871.30
1.86
4.2.7.2. Evaluation of MAD, MSE, MAPE
There are three error measurement that are used to evaluate the forecasting method.
First error measurement is MAD. To find the value of MAD, the total value of |dt-
dt’| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
∑𝑡= | ′
− | ,
𝐴 = = = .
Second error measurement is MSE. To find the value of MSE, the total value of (dt-
dt’)2 should be found out and calculate the average of it.
∑𝑡= ′
− .
= = = ,
Third error measurement is MAPE. To find the value of MAPE, the total value of
|PEt| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
′
− ,
|𝑃 |= × %= × %= , %
∑𝑡= |𝑃 | , %
𝐴𝑃 = = = , %
For α= 0.5 and α= 0.7, the method is same using the formula of MAD, MSE, and
MAPE. After all of error values already calculated, the lowest value of error will be
choosen.
α = 0.3
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 Pet |PEt|
54.87 54.87 3011.22 3.21% 3.21%
89.91 89.91 8083.41 5.05% 5.05%
-135.01 135.01 18228.17 -8.32% 8.32%
-714.94 714.94 511132.63 -72.95% 72.95%
58.88 58.88 3467.27 4.45% 4.45%
331.16 331.16 109667.75 21.13% 21.13%
53.48 53.48 2860.30 3.73% 3.73%
222.39 222.39 49458.20 13.82% 13.82%
146.79 146.79 21547.89 8.91% 8.91%
1.87
Table 4.48. MAD, MSE, and MAPE Calculation (α =0.3) (Continued)
SUM TOTAL
-103.36 3344.05 1475002.60 254.44%
AVERAGE
185.78 81944.59 14.14%
MAD MSE MAPE
α = 0.5
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 PEt |PEt|
34.00 34.00 1156.00 1.99% 1.99%
60.50 60.50 3660.25 3.40% 3.40%
-181.00 181.00 32761.00 -11.15% 11.15%
-680.13 680.13 462570.02 -69.40% 69.40%
350.13 350.13 122587.52 26.48% 26.48%
423.16 423.16 179061.21 27.00% 27.00%
-42.38 42.38 1795.64 -2.96% 2.96%
159.84 159.84 25547.53 9.93% 9.93%
34.43 34.43 1185.40 2.09% 2.09%
-152.53 152.53 23265.19 -9.90% 9.90%
190.86 190.86 36428.79 10.70% 10.70%
-111.00 111.00 12321.98 -6.58% 6.58%
15.28 15.28 233.47 0.87% 0.87%
75.03 75.03 5629.63 4.00% 4.00%
-8.79 8.79 77.25 -0.46% 0.46%
-827.55 827.55 684833.68 -72.85% 72.85%
368.65 368.65 135903.18 23.63% 23.63%
306.54 306.54 93965.04 17.87% 17.87%
SUM TOTAL
1.88
Table 4.49. MAD, MSE, and MAPE Calculation (α =0.5) (Continued)
α = 0.7
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 PEt |PEt|
31.30 31.30 979.69 1.83% 1.83%
65.82 65.82 4332.27 3.69% 3.69%
-170.43 170.43 29044.68 -10.50% 10.50%
-647.83 647.83 419682.15 -66.10% 66.10%
386.59 386.59 149452.58 29.24% 29.24%
312.96 312.96 97943.44 19.97% 19.97%
-139.27 139.27 19395.49 -9.71% 9.71%
149.72 149.72 22417.00 9.31% 9.31%
27.62 27.62 762.75 1.68% 1.68%
-130.25 130.25 16966.19 -8.46% 8.46%
233.56 233.56 54551.11 13.09% 13.09%
-102.74 102.74 10555.51 -6.09% 6.09%
57.74 57.74 3333.38 3.27% 3.27%
103.19 103.19 10647.73 5.50% 5.50%
15.22 15.22 231.54 0.80% 0.80%
-789.66 789.66 623558.17 -69.51% 69.51%
449.34 449.34 201903.13 28.80% 28.80%
220.07 220.07 48431.21 12.83% 12.83%
SUM TOTAL
72.95 4033.292795 1714188.02 300.39%
AVERAGE
224.07 95232.67 16.69%
MAD MSE MAPE
1.89
Based on the figure above, the alpha (∝ that have the lowest values of error is ∝
= . . Because of it has the lowest error than the other two alpha (∝ , so it is the
best for this method and then it is used to the validation process now.
4.2.7.3. Validation
After determining the value of MAD, MSE, and MAPE, next step, do validation
towards the forecasting method. There two kinds of validation, such as verification
and tracking signal, in this case using tracking signal – brown.
Verification
In order to show the control chart, there are several calculation. First, calculate
the value of (dt'-dt)-(d(t-1)'-d(t-1)) as a value of MRt. After that, find out the
value of MR using formula as belows.
∑𝑡=
= = ,
−
Find the lower and upper limit of control chart using formula as belows.
= , × , = ,
=− , × , =− ,
After the value of MRt, UCL, LCL, and CL are known, now plot the data in line
graph like in the figure.
1.90
Table 4.52. MR and Control Limit Calculation
MR 301.74
UCL 802.6256364
LCL -802.6256364
MRt UCL 2/3 UCL 1/3 UCL LCL 2/3 1/3 LCL CL
LCL
35.03 802.63 535.0838 267.5419 -802.63 - - 0
535.084 267.5418788
224.92 802.63 535.0838 267.5419 -802.63 - - 0
535.084 267.5418788
579.92 802.63 535.0838 267.5419 -802.63 - - 0
535.084 267.5418788
773.82 802.63 535.0838 267.5419 -802.63 - - 0
535.084 267.5418788
272.28 802.63 535.0838 267.5419 -802.63 - - 0
535.084 267.5418788
277.68 802.63 535.0838 267.5419 -802.63 - - 0
535.084 267.5418788
168.91 802.63 535.0838 267.5419 -802.63 - - 0
535.084 267.5418788
1.91
Table 4.53. MR and Control Limit Calculation (Continued)
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. Since the out of
control are two points, it is slightly pass the verification test.
Other method to validate the method is by using the tracking signal brown check.
To find out the value of tracking signal, there are several values should be found
1.92
out first. The calculation could be seen in the table below. To find out the value of MAD, using previous one. The tracking signal could
be found by using formula as belows.
∑𝑡= ′
− ,
𝑖 𝑖 = = = =
𝐴 𝐴 ,
After the value of tracking signal in sample data already known, determine the control limit. The common control limit values is UCL
= 4, LCL = -4, and CL = 0. Plot the data using the line graph, the result is shown in the figure.
Period dt dt' dt-dt' RSFE |dt-dt'| Cum |dt-dt'| MAD Tracking Signal UCL CL LCL
Cumulative
1 1708.00 1653.13 54.87 54.87 54.87 54.87 54.87463 1.00 4 0 -4
2 1782.00 1692.09 89.91 144.78 89.91 144.78 72.39119 2.00 4 0 -4
3 1623.00 1758.01 -135.01 9.77 135.01 279.79 93.26471 0.10 4 0 -4
4 980.00 1694.94 -714.94 -705.16 714.94 994.73 248.6824 -2.84 4 0 -4
5 1322.00 1263.12 58.88 -646.28 58.88 1053.61 210.7226 -3.07 4 0 -4
6 1567.00 1235.84 331.16 -315.12 331.16 1384.77 230.7957 -1.37 4 0 -4
7 1434.00 1380.52 53.48 -261.64 53.48 1438.26 205.4651 -1.27 4 0 -4
8 1609.00 1386.61 222.39 -39.25 222.39 1660.65 207.581 -0.19 4 0 -4
9 1648.00 1501.21 146.79 107.55 146.79 1807.44 200.8267 0.54 4 0 -4
10 1540.00 1590.99 -50.99 56.56 50.99 1858.43 185.8427 0.30 4 0 -4
11 1784.00 1573.86 210.14 266.70 210.14 2068.57 188.0516 1.42 4 0 -4
12 1688.00 1712.10 -24.10 242.60 24.10 2092.66 174.3887 1.39 4 0 -4
1.93
Table 4.54. Tracking Signal Calculation (Continued)
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is in control. So, it is slightly pass the tracking signal test.
1.94
4.2.8. Double Exponential Smoothing (DES) – Holt Method
In this part,the double exponential smooting (DES) will be forecasted by using other
method, which is Brown Method.
In this forecast method, there are two kinds, such DES-Holt by using α = 0.2 γ =
0,3 and α = 0.5 γ = 0.6. In the comparation of error measurement, there will be
chosen the smallest error. In order to get the formula of forecast demand, there are
several things should be calculated first, such as St and bt. How to calculate those
formula as belows. Here are example of calculation with α = 0.2 γ = 0,3.
=∝ + −∝ 𝑡− + 𝑡−
= . + . − =
= − 𝑡− + − 𝑡− = . − + . =
𝑡+ = + = + =
To find the forecast demand by using α = 0.5 γ = 0.6 , using formula like as above.
The forecast demand shown as belows.
1.95
Table 4.55. DES – Holt Forecast Demand (Continued)
There are three error measurement that are used to evaluate the forecasting method.
First error measurement is MAD. To find the value of MAD, the total value of |dt-
dt’| should be found out and calculate the average of it. Here are example calculation
of α = 0.2 γ = 0,3.
∑𝑡= | ′
− | ,
𝐴 = = = ,
Second error measurement is MSE. To find the value of MSE, the total value of (dt-
dt’)2 should be found out and calculate the average of it.
∑𝑡= ′
− .
= = = ,
Third error measurement is MAPE. To find the value of MAPE, the total value of
|PEt| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
′
−
|𝑃 |= × %= × %= , %
∑𝑡= |𝑃 | , %
𝐴𝑃 = = = , %
1.96
For α = 0.5 γ = 0.6., the method is same using the formula of MAD, MSE, and
MAPE. After all of error values already calculated, the lowest value of error will be
choosen.
α = 0.2 γ = 0,3
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 Pet |PEt|
-20.00 20.00 400.00 -1.17% 1.17%
5.20 5.20 27.04 0.29% 0.29%
-207.95 207.95 43244.03 - 12.81%
12.81%
-850.00 850.00 722494.02 - 86.73%
86.73%
-327.63 327.63 107342.91 - 24.78%
24.78%
12.92 12.92 166.85 0.82% 0.82%
-93.42 93.42 8727.03 -6.51% 6.51%
135.12 135.12 18256.90 8.40% 8.40%
173.84 173.84 30220.46 10.55% 10.55%
47.39 47.39 2245.59 3.08% 3.08%
295.38 295.38 87250.72 16.56% 16.56%
136.06 136.06 18510.99 8.06% 8.06%
174.43 174.43 30425.82 9.88% 9.88%
226.66 226.66 51376.63 12.08% 12.08%
174.85 174.85 30573.07 9.17% 9.17%
-677.09 677.09 458450.26 - 59.60%
59.60%
-124.02 124.02 15380.24 -7.95% 7.95%
56.88 56.88 3235.55 3.32% 3.32%
SUM TOTAL
-861.38 3738.834 1628328.11 281.78%
AVERAGE
207.71 90462.67 15.65%
MAD MSE MAPE
1.97
Table 4.57. MAD, MSE, and MAPE (α = 0.5 γ = 0,6)
α = 0.5 γ = 0,6
dt-dt' |dt-dt'| (dt-dt')^2 Pet |PEt|
-20.00 20.00 400.00 -1.17% 1.17%
16.00 16.00 256.00 0.90% 0.90%
-203.80 203.80 41534.44 - 12.56%
12.56%
-736.56 736.56 542520.63 - 75.16%
75.16%
203.03 203.03 41220.37 15.36% 15.36%
514.91 514.91 265136.02 32.86% 32.86%
138.38 138.38 19149.67 9.65% 9.65%
216.60 216.60 46916.42 13.46% 13.46%
54.73 54.73 2995.51 3.32% 3.32%
-189.62 189.62 35957.08 - 12.31%
12.31%
97.09 97.09 9425.72 5.44% 5.44%
-128.68 128.68 16559.79 -7.62% 7.62%
-28.96 28.96 838.97 -1.64% 1.64%
61.58 61.58 3792.66 3.28% 3.28%
8.38 8.38 70.29 0.44% 0.44%
-820.73 820.73 673600.34 - 72.25%
72.25%
204.93 204.93 41996.36 13.14% 13.14%
387.28 387.28 149987.32 22.58% 22.58%
SUM TOTAL
-225.44 4031.289 1892357.58 303.14%
AVERAGE
223.96 105130.98 16.84%
MAD MSE MAPE
1.98
Based on the figure above, the alpha (∝ that have the lowest values of error is α =
0.2 γ = 0.3. Because of it has the lowest error than the other alternative, so it is the
best for this method and then it is used to the validation process now.
4.2.8.3. Validation
After determining the value of MAD, MSE, and MAPE, next step, do validation
towards the forecasting method. There two kinds of validation, such as verification
and tracking signal, in this case using tracking signal – brown.
Verification
In order to show the control chart, there are several calculation. First, calculate the
value of (dt'-dt)-(d(t-1)'-d(t-1)) as a value of MRt. After that, find out the value of
MR using formula as belows.
∑𝑡=
= = ,
−
Find the lower and upper limit of control chart using formula as belows.
= , × , = ,
=− , × , =− ,
After the value of MRt, UCL, LCL, and CL are known, now plot the data in line
graph like in the figure.
1.99
Table 4.59. MR and Control Limit Calculation
MR 257.59
UCL 685.1867597
LCL -685.1867597
MRt UCL 2/3 UCL 1/3 UCL LCL 2/3 1/3 LCL CL
LCL
25.20 685.19 456.791 228.395 -685.19 - - 0
2 6 456.791 228.39559
213.15 685.19 456.791 228.395 -685.19 - - 0
2 6 456.791 228.39559
642.04 685.19 456.791 228.395 -685.19 - - 0
2 6 456.791 228.39559
522.36 685.19 456.791 228.395 -685.19 - - 0
2 6 456.791 228.39559
340.55 685.19 456.791 228.395 -685.19 - - 0
2 6 456.791 228.39559
106.34 685.19 456.791 228.395 -685.19 - - 0
2 6 456.791 228.39559
228.54 685.19 456.791 228.395 -685.19 - - 0
2 6 456.791 228.39559
1.100
Table 4.60. MR and Control Limit Calculation (Continued)
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. Since the out of
control are one points, it is slightly pass the verification test.
Other method to validate the method is by using the tracking signal brown check.
To find out the value of tracking signal, there are several values should be found
1.101
out first. The calculation could be seen in the table below. To find out the value of MAD, using previous one. The tracking signal could
be found by using formula as belows.
∑𝑡= ′
− −
𝑖 𝑖 = = = =−
𝐴 𝐴
After the value of tracking signal in sample data already known, determine the control limit. The common control limit values is UCL
= 4, LCL = -4, and CL = 0. Plot the data using the line graph, the result is shown in the figure.
Period dt dt' dt-dt' RSFE |dt-dt'| Cum |dt- MAD Tracking Signal UCL CL LCL
Cumulativ dt'|
e
1 1708.00 1728.00 -20.00 -20.00 20.00 20.00 20 -1.00 4 0 -4
2 1782.00 1776.80 5.20 -14.80 5.20 25.20 12.6 -1.17 4 0 -4
3 1623.00 1830.95 -207.95 -222.75 207.95 233.15 77.7173 -2.87 4 0 -4
3
4 980.00 1830.00 -850.00 -1072.75 850.00 1083.15 270.787 -3.96 4 0 -4
1
5 1322.00 1649.63 -327.63 -1400.38 327.63 1410.78 282.156 -4.96 4 0 -4
2
6 1567.00 1554.08 12.92 -1387.46 12.92 1423.70 237.283 -5.85 4 0 -4
7 1434.00 1527.42 -93.42 -1480.88 93.42 1517.12 216.730 -6.83 4 0 -4
9
8 1609.00 1473.88 135.12 -1345.76 135.12 1652.23 206.529 -6.52 4 0 -4
3
1.102
Table 4.61. Tracking Signal Calculation (Continued)
1.103
Figure 4.18. DES Holt Tracking Signal - Brown
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. Since the out of
control are one points, it is slightly pass the verification test.
𝜋
=
Then, calculate the value as like in the table, and the value of dt’ is calculated by
formula as below.
′
= + + sin
1.104
Table 4.62. Cyclic Forecast Demand
1.105
Table 4.62. Cyclic Forecast Demand (Continued)
A 1588,845
B -161,49
C -22,1
∑ = . + ∑ cos + ∑ sin
𝑡= 𝑡= 𝑡=
= −
1.106
∑ cos = ∑ cos + ∑ + ∑ sin cos
𝑡= 𝑡= 𝑡= 𝑡=
− =− + ,
− , = ,
By substitute or eliminating the equations above, the values of a,b,and c could be known.
There are three error measurement that are used to evaluate the forecasting method. First error measurement is MAD. To find the value
of MAD, the total value of |dt-dt’| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
∑𝑡= | ′
− | ,
𝐴 = = = ,
Second error measurement is MSE. To find the value of MSE, the total value of (dt-dt’)2 should be found out and calculate the average
of it.
∑𝑡= ′
− ,
= = = ,
1.107
Third error measurement is MAPE. To find the value of MAPE, the total value of
|PEt| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
′
− ,
|𝑃 |= × %= × %= , %
∑𝑡= |𝑃 | , %
𝐴𝑃 = = = , %
1.108
4.2.9.3. Validation
After determining the value of MAD, MSE, and MAPE, next step, do validation
towards the forecasting method. There two kinds of validation, such as verification
and tracking signal, in this case using tracking signal – brown.
Verification
In order to show the control chart, there are several calculation. First, calculate
the value of (dt'-dt)-(d(t-1)'-d(t-1)) as a value of MRt. After that, find out the
value of MR using formula as belows.
∑𝑡=
= = ,
−
Find the lower and upper limit of control chart using formula as belows.
= , × , = ,
=− , × , =− ,
After the value of MRt, UCL, LCL, and CL are known, now plot the data in line
graph like in the figure.
1.109
Table 4.65. MR and Control Limit Calculation (Continued)
MR 165.13
UCL 439.2458
LCL -439.2458
MRt UCL 2/3 UCL 1/3 UCL LCL 2/3 1/3 LCL CL
LCL
15.72 439.25 292.8305 146.4153 -439.25 - - 0
292.831 146.415267
295.37 439.25 292.8305 146.4153 -439.25 - - 0
292.831 146.415267
149.10 439.25 292.8305 146.4153 -439.25 - - 0
292.831 146.415267
197.28 439.25 292.8305 146.4153 -439.25 - - 0
292.831 146.415267
381.63 439.25 292.8305 146.4153 -439.25 - - 0
292.831 146.415267
118.90 439.25 292.8305 146.4153 -439.25 - - 0
292.831 146.415267
206.72 439.25 292.8305 146.4153 -439.25 - - 0
292.831 146.415267
128.37 439.25 292.8305 146.4153 -439.25 - - 0
292.831 146.415267
48.10 439.25 292.8305 146.4153 -439.25 - - 0
292.831 146.415267
0.72 439.25 292.8305 146.4153 -439.25 - - 0
292.831 146.415267
153.37 439.25 292.8305 146.4153 -439.25 - - 0
292.831 146.415267
20.90 439.25 292.8305 146.4153 -439.25 - - 0
292.831 146.415267
134.28 439.25 292.8305 146.4153 -439.25 - - 0
292.831 146.415267
1.110
Table 4.66. MR and Control Limit Calculation (Continued)
400.00
200.00
0.00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
-200.00
-400.00
-600.00
MRt UCL 2/3 UCL 1/3 UCL LCL 2/3 LCL 1/3 LCL CL
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. Since the out of
control is one point, it is slightly pass the verification test.
Other method to validate the method is by using the tracking signal brown check.
To find out the value of tracking signal, there are several values should be found
out first. The calculation could be seen in the table below. To find out the value of
MAD, using previous one. The tracking signal could be found by using formula as
belows.
1.111
∑𝑡= ′
− − ,
𝑖 𝑖 = = = =−
𝐴 𝐴 ,
After the value of tracking signal in sample data already known, determine the control limit. The common control limit values is UCL
= 4, LCL = -4, and CL = 0. Plot the data using the line graph, the result is shown in the figure.
Period dt dt’ dt-dt’ RSFE |dt-dt'| Cum MAD Tracking UCL CL LCL
Cumulative |dt-dt'| Signal
1 1620.00 1650.45 -30.45 -30.45 30.45 30.45 30.45084 -1.00 4 0 -4
2 1674.00 1688.73 -14.73 -45.18 14.73 45.18 22.59 -2.00 4 0 -4
3 1708.00 1427.36 280.65 235.47 280.65 325.83 108.6083 2.17 4 0 -4
4 1782.00 1650.45 131.55 367.01 131.55 457.37 114.3435 3.21 4 0 -4
5 1623.00 1688.73 -65.73 301.29 65.73 523.10 104.6207 2.88 4 0 -4
6 980.00 1427.36 -447.36 -146.07 447.36 970.46 161.7431 -0.90 4 0 -4
7 1322.00 1650.45 -328.45 -474.52 328.45 1298.91 185.5585 -2.56 4 0 -4
8 1567.00 1688.73 -121.73 -596.25 121.73 1420.64 177.5798 -3.36 4 0 -4
9 1434.00 1427.36 6.64 -589.61 6.64 1427.28 158.587 -3.72 4 0 -4
10 1609.00 1650.45 -41.45 -631.06 41.45 1468.73 146.8734 -4.30 4 0 -4
11 1648.00 1688.73 -40.73 -671.79 40.73 1509.46 137.2239 -4.90 4 0 -4
12 1540.00 1427.36 112.65 -559.14 112.65 1622.11 135.1757 -4.14 4 0 -4
13 1784.00 1650.45 133.55 -425.59 133.55 1755.66 135.0506 -3.15 4 0 -4
14 1688.00 1688.73 -0.73 -426.32 0.73 1756.39 125.4562 -3.40 4 0 -4
15 1766.00 1427.36 338.65 -87.68 338.65 2095.03 139.6688 -0.63 4 0 -4
1.112
Table 4.67 Tracking Signal Calculation (Continued)
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. Since the out of control is two point, it is slightly pass the tracking
signal test.
1.113
4.2.10. Linear Cyclic Method
Linear Cyclic method is one of regression analysis. The calculation of forecasting
is showed as belows.
𝜋
=
Then, calculate the value as like in the table, and the value of dt’ is calculated by
formula as below.
′
= + + cos + sin
January-16 1 1620 0 0 -1 1 0
February-16 2 1674 0 0 1 1 0
March-16 3 1708 0 0 -1 1 0
April-16 4 1782 0 0 1 1 0
May-16 5 1623 0 0 -1 1 0
June-16 6 980 0 0 1 1 0
July-16 7 1322 0 0 -1 1 0
August-16 8 1567 0 0 1 1 0
September- 9 1434 0 0 -1 1 0
16
October-16 10 1609 0 0 1 1 0
November- 11 1648 0 0 -1 1 0
16
December- 12 1540 0 0 1 1 0
16
January-17 13 1784 0 0 -1 1 0
February-17 14 1688 0 0 1 1 0
March-17 15 1766 0 0 -1 1 0
April-17 16 1876 0 0 1 1 0
May-17 17 1906 0 0 -1 1 0
June-17 18 1136 0 0 1 1 0
July-17 19 1560 0 0 -1 1 0
1.114
Table 4.68. Linear Cyclic Forecast Demand (Continued)
August-17 20 1715 0 0 1 1 0
1.115
Table 4.69. Linear Cyclic Forecast Demand (Continued)
1631.15
1723.08
1642.61
a 1536.73
b 5.73
c -43.1
∑ = . + ∑ + ∑ cos + ∑ sin
𝑡= 𝑡= 𝑡= 𝑡=
= +
= + +
∑ cos
𝑡=
= ∑ cos
𝑡=
+ ∑ . cos
𝑡=
+ ∑ + ∑ sin cos
𝑡= 𝑡=
− = +
1.116
4.2.10.2. Evaluation of MAD, MSE, MAPE
There are three error measurement that are used to evaluate the forecasting method.
First error measurement is MAD. To find the value of MAD, the total value of |dt-
dt’| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
∑𝑡= | ′
− | ,
𝐴 = = = ,
Second error measurement is MSE. To find the value of MSE, the total value of (dt-
dt’)2 should be found out and calculate the average of it.
∑𝑡= ′
− ,
= = = ,
Third error measurement is MAPE. To find the value of MAPE, the total value of
|PEt| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
′
− ,
|𝑃 |= × %= × %= , %
∑𝑡= |𝑃 | , %
𝐴𝑃 = = = , %
1.117
Table 4.71. MAD,MSE, and MAPE Calculation (Continued)
4.2.10.3. Validation
After determining the value of MAD, MSE, and MAPE, next step, do validation
towards the forecasting method. There two kinds of validation, such as verification
and tracking signal, in this case using tracking signal – brown.
Verification
In order to show the control chart, there are several calculation. First, calculate the
value of (dt'-dt)-(d(t-1)'-d(t-1)) as a value of MRt. After that, find out the value of
MR using formula as belows.
∑𝑡=
= = ,
−
Find the lower and upper limit of control chart using formula as belows.
= , × , = ,
=− , × , =− ,
After the value of MRt, UCL, LCL, and CL are known, now plot the data in line
graph like in the figure.
1.118
Table 4.72. MR and Control Limit Calculation
MR 176.62
UCL 469.7966
LCL -469.7966
MRt UCL 2/3 UCL 1/3 UCL LCL 2/3 1/3 LCL CL
LCL
48.27 469.80 313.197 156.598 -469.80 - - 0
7 9 313.198 156.5988
7
92.92 469.80 313.197 156.598 -469.80 - - 0
7 9 313.198 156.5988
7
3.62 469.80 313.197 156.598 -469.80 - - 0
7 9 313.198 156.5988
7
164.73 469.80 313.197 156.598 -469.80 - - 0
7 9 313.198 156.5988
7
1.119
Table 4.73. MR and Control Limit Calculation (Continued)
1.120
Cyclic Linear Verification Test
800.00
600.00
400.00
200.00
0.00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
-200.00
-400.00
-600.00
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. So it is
mean that this method is not good enough for predicting future demand.
Other method to validate the method is by using the tracking signal brown check.
To find out the value of tracking signal, there are several values should be found
out first. The calculation could be seen in the table below. To find out the value of
MAD, using previous one. The tracking signal could be found by using formula as
belows.
∑𝑡= ′
− ,
𝑖 𝑖 = = = =
𝐴 𝐴 ,
After the value of tracking signal in sample data already known, determine the
control limit. The common control limit values is UCL = 4, LCL = -4, and CL = 0.
Plot the data using the line graph, the result is shown in the figure.
1.121
Table 4.74. Tracking Signal Calculation
Period dt dt' dt-dt' RSFE |dt-dt'| Cum MAD Tracking Signal UCL CL LCL
Cumulative |dt-dt'|
1 1620.00 1564.01 55.99 55.99 55.99 55.99 55.99 1.00 4 0 -4
2 1674.00 1569.74 104.26 160.25 104.26 160.25 80.125 2.00 4 0 -4
3 1708.00 1510.82 197.18 357.43 197.18 357.43 119.1433 3.00 4 0 -4
4 1782.00 1581.20 200.80 558.23 200.80 558.23 139.5575 4.00 4 0 -4
5 1623.00 1586.93 36.07 594.30 36.07 594.30 118.86 5.00 4 0 -4
6 980.00 1528.01 -548.01 46.29 548.01 1142.31 190.385 0.24 4 0 -4
7 1322.00 1598.39 -276.39 -230.10 276.39 1418.70 202.6714 -1.14 4 0 -4
8 1567.00 1604.12 -37.12 -267.22 37.12 1455.82 181.9775 -1.47 4 0 -4
9 1434.00 1545.20 -111.20 -378.42 111.20 1567.02 174.1133 -2.17 4 0 -4
10 1609.00 1615.58 -6.58 -385.00 6.58 1573.60 157.36 -2.45 4 0 -4
11 1648.00 1621.31 26.69 -358.31 26.69 1600.29 145.4809 -2.46 4 0 -4
12 1540.00 1562.39 -22.39 -380.70 22.39 1622.68 135.2233 -2.82 4 0 -4
13 1784.00 1632.77 151.23 -229.47 151.23 1773.91 136.4546 -1.68 4 0 -4
14 1688.00 1638.50 49.50 -179.97 49.50 1823.41 130.2436 -1.38 4 0 -4
15 1766.00 1579.58 186.42 6.45 186.42 2009.83 133.9887 0.05 4 0 -4
16 1876.00 1649.96 226.04 232.49 226.04 2235.87 139.7419 1.66 4 0 -4
17 1906.00 1655.69 250.31 482.80 250.31 2486.18 146.2459 3.30 4 0 -4
18 1136.00 1596.77 -460.77 22.03 460.77 2946.95 163.7194 0.13 4 0 -4
19 1560.00 1667.15 -107.15 -85.12 107.15 3054.10 160.7421 -0.53 4 0 -4
20 1715.00 1672.88 42.12 -43.00 42.12 3096.22 154.811 -0.28 4 0 -4
1.122
Cyclic Linear Tracking Signal - Brown
6.00
5.00
4.00
3.00
2.00
1.00
0.00
-1.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
-2.00
-3.00
-4.00
-5.00
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. Since the out of
control is one point, it is slightly pass the verification test.
1.123
Table 4.75. Linear Constant Forecast Demand (Contineud)
b 5,082707
a 1543,53
∑𝑡= ∑𝑡=
= − = − , = ,
′
= +
1.124
4.2.11.2. Evaluation of MAD, MSE, MAPE
There are three error measurement that are used to evaluate the forecasting method.
First error measurement is MAD. To find the value of MAD, the total value of |dt-
dt’| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
∑𝑡= | ′
− | ,
𝐴 = = = ,
Second error measurement is MSE. To find the value of MSE, the total value of (dt-
dt’)2 should be found out and calculate the average of it.
∑𝑡= ′
− ,
= = = ,
Third error measurement is MAPE. To find the value of MAPE, the total value of
|PEt| should be found out and calculate the average of it.
′
− ,
|𝑃 |= × %= × %= , %
∑𝑡= |𝑃 | , %
𝐴𝑃 = = = , %
1.125
Table 4.77. MAD, MSE, and MAPE Calculation
SUM TOTAL
0.00 3334.51 999224.25 239.34%
AVERAGE
166.73 49961.21 11.97%
MAD MSE MAPE
4.2.11.3. Validation
After determining the value of MAD, MSE, and MAPE, next step, do validation
towards the forecasting method. There two kinds of validation, such as verification
and tracking signal, in this case using tracking signal – brown.
1.126
Verification
In order to show the control chart, there are several calculation. First, calculate the
value of (dt'-dt)-(d(t-1)'-d(t-1)) as a value of MRt. After that, find out the value of
MR using formula as belows.
∑𝑡=
= = ,
−
Find the lower and upper limit of control chart using formula as belows.
= , × , = ,
=− , × , =− ,
After the value of MRt, UCL, LCL, and CL are known, now plot the data in line
graph like in the figure.
1.127
Table 4.78. MR and Control Limit Calculation (Continued)
-69.81 80.10
MR 194.62
UCL 517.6964706
LCL -517.6964706
1.128
Figure 4.23. Constant Liner Verification Test
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. Since the out of
control is two point, it is slightly pass the verification test.
Other method to validate the method is by using the tracking signal brown check.
To find out the value of tracking signal, there are several values should be found
out first. The calculation could be seen in the table below. To find out the value of
MAD, using previous one. The tracking signal could be found by using formula as
belows.
∑𝑡= ′
− ,
𝑖 𝑖 = = = =
𝐴 𝐴 ,
After the value of tracking signal in sample data already known, determine the
control limit. The common control limit values is UCL = 4, LCL = -4, and CL = 0.
Plot the data using the line graph, the result is shown in the figure.
1.129
Table 4.80. Tracking Signal Calculation
Period dt dt' dt-dt' RSFE |dt-dt'| Cum |dt-dt'| MAD Tracking UCL CL LCL
Cumulative Signal
1 1620.00 1548.61 71.39 71.39 71.39 71.39 71.38571 1.00 4 0 -4
2 1674.00 1553.70 120.30 191.69 120.30 191.69 95.84436 2.00 4 0 -4
3 1708.00 1558.78 149.22 340.91 149.22 340.91 113.6363 3.00 4 0 -4
4 1782.00 1563.86 218.14 559.05 218.14 559.05 139.7617 4.00 4 0 -4
5 1623.00 1568.95 54.05 613.10 54.05 613.10 122.6203 5.00 4 0 -4
6 980.00 1574.03 -594.03 19.07 594.03 1207.13 201.1882 0.09 4 0 -4
7 1322.00 1579.11 -257.11 -238.04 257.11 1464.24 209.1771 -1.14 4 0 -4
8 1567.00 1584.19 -17.19 -255.23 17.19 1481.43 185.1791 -1.38 4 0 -4
9 1434.00 1589.28 -155.28 -410.51 155.28 1636.71 181.8566 -2.26 4 0 -4
10 1609.00 1594.36 14.64 -395.86 14.64 1651.35 165.135 -2.40 4 0 -4
11 1648.00 1599.44 48.56 -347.31 48.56 1699.91 154.5372 -2.25 4 0 -4
12 1540.00 1604.52 -64.52 -411.83 64.52 1764.43 147.0361 -2.80 4 0 -4
13 1784.00 1609.61 174.39 -237.44 174.39 1938.83 149.1405 -1.59 4 0 -4
14 1688.00 1614.69 73.31 -164.13 73.31 2012.14 143.7241 -1.14 4 0 -4
15 1766.00 1619.77 146.23 -17.90 146.23 2158.36 143.891 -0.12 4 0 -4
16 1876.00 1624.85 251.15 233.25 251.15 2409.51 150.5944 1.55 4 0 -4
17 1906.00 1629.94 276.06 509.31 276.06 2685.57 157.9748 3.22 4 0 -4
18 1136.00 1635.02 -499.02 10.29 499.02 3184.59 176.9218 0.06 4 0 -4
19 1560.00 1640.10 -80.10 -69.81 80.10 3264.70 171.8261 -0.41 4 0 -4
20 1715.00 1645.19 69.81 0.00 69.81 3334.51 166.7255 0.00 4 0 -4
1.130
Constant Linear Tracking Signal - Brown
6.00
5.00
4.00
3.00
2.00
1.00
0.00
-1.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
-2.00
-3.00
-4.00
-5.00
From the figure above, it showed that the graph is out of control. Since the out of
control is one point, it is slightly pass the verification test.
1.131
Table 4.81. Comparation MAD, MSE, MAPE, and Validation Test
By comparing the error measurement (MAD, MSE, MAPE) between the forecasting methods, the three rank lowest error is
cyclic method, constant linear, and cyclic linear. After pass the error test, there are validation test. Three of them are not passed the
validation test. To check which one is best method, there are IIDN testing to check the forecasting methods. There are two kinds of
IIDN test, such as normality test and auto correlation test.
1.132
a. Normality Test
The test is to check the data is already normal or not. There are null
hyphotesis (Ho) that the data is normal and the alternatives hyphothesis (H1) is
not normal.
From the figure below, it is shown the probability plot of residual cyclic
method. The p-value is larger than 0.05, so do not reject Ho. It is mean that the
data is normal.
1.133
From the figure below, it is shown the probability plot of residual cyclic method.
The p-value is smaller than 0.05, so reject Ho. It is mean that the data is not normal.
From the figure below, it is shown the probability plot of residual cyclic method.
The p-value is smaller than 0.05, so reject Ho. It is mean that the data is not normal.
1.134
Figure 4.27. Probability Plot of Residual Cyclic Linear
a. Autocorrelation Test
The purpose of autocorrelation test is to check whether they are correlation between
data or not (independent). If it is autocorrelation, the data will have the same sign
for some periods. But if it is not autocorrelation, there will be a fast change in the
signs of consecutive residuals.
From the figure below, it showed that the data is independent (not correlated each
others). There will be a fast change in the signs of consecutive residuals.
1.135
Figure 4.28. Autocorrelation Function for Residual Cyclic
From the figure below, it showed that the data is independent (not
correlated each others). There will be a fast change in the signs of consecutive
residuals.
1.136
Autocorrelation Test for Cyclic Linear
From the figure below, it showed that the data is independent (not
correlated each others). There will be a fast change in the signs of consecutive
residuals.
From the figure below, it could be seen that all of standardized residual are between
2 and -2. It is not show any pattern. So, the data is normally distributed and has
constant variance.
1.137
Figure 4.31. Versus Fits Cyclic Method
From the figure below, it could be seen that all of standardized residual are between
2 and -2. But there are pattern between the data. So, the data is considered, not
normally distributed and has not constant variance.
1.138
Standardized Residual Test for Cyclic Linear Method
From the figure below, it could be seen that one of standardized residual are outside
of 2 and -2. There are pattern between the data. So, the data is considered, not
normally distributed and has not constant variance.
Based on calculation of error (MAD, MSE, MAPE), validation test, and IIDN test,
the best method is cyclic method. Because this method has lowest error, and pass
IIDN test. The data is normally distributed and the data is already independent, has
constant variance.
The forecasting for Sept 2017 – Feb 2018 are shown as belows.
Period dt'
Sept 1427.36
Oct 1650.45
Nov 1688.73
Dec 1427.36
Jan 1650.45
Feb 1688.73
1.139
CHAPTER V
CONCLUSION
The demand of product X over the last 20 months showed seasonal pattern. It could
be seen from the scatterplot between the data. There are high and low demand that
occured in several months. To forecast the demand,there are eleven forecasting
methods are used, such as LPD, Arithmatic Average, SMA, WMA, DMA, SES,
DES Browns, DES Holt, Cyclic, Constant Linear, and Cyclic Linear. To determine
which methods is the best, checking error (MAD, MSE, MAPE), validation test,
and IIDN are conducted.
From the comparation of error measurement, there are three smallest error, such as
Cyclic, Constant Linear, and Cyclic Linear. All of the methods are testes by IIDN
test. The results show that Constant Linear and Cyclic Linear are not independent
and normal. So they are not normally distributed. Just cyclic method are normally
disributed and independent.
From the analysis,it could be concluded that cyclic method as the best method based
on calculation. This method has smallest error, slighlty pass the validation test, and
pass the IIDN test, independent and normally distributed (p-value > 0.05). It is
recommended used for predicticing the forecast demand.
1.140
REFERENCE
1.141
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER I ......................................................................................................... 2.2
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... 2.2
1.1 Background ........................................................................................... 2.2
1.2 Objectives .............................................................................................. 2.2
1.3 Tools and Equipment(s) ........................................................................ 2.3
1.4 Steps ........................................................................................................... 2.3
CHAPTER II ........................................................................................................ 2.4
LITERATURE STUDY ....................................................................................... 2.4
CHAPTER III .................................................................................................... 2.12
DATA COLLECTION....................................................................................... 2.12
CHAPTER IV .................................................................................................... 2.17
DATA ANALYSIS ............................................................................................ 2.17
4.1. Workforce/Chase Strategy ...................................................................... 2.17
4.2. Inventory Strategy/ Strategy Level (No Overtime) ................................. 2.21
4.3. Inventory Strategy/ Strategy Level (Overtime)....................................... 2.25
4.4. Transportation ......................................................................................... 2.29
4.5. Mixed Strategy ........................................................................................ 2.34
4.6. Stable ....................................................................................................... 2.39
4.7. Zero Inventory......................................................................................... 2.43
CHAPTER V...................................................................................................... 2.48
CONCLUSION .................................................................................................. 2.48
REFERENCE ..................................................................................................... 2.49
2.1
CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background
Aggregate Planning is the process of developing, analyzing, and maintaining a
preliminary, approximate schedule of the overall operations of an organization. In
other words, aggregate planning is an operational activity critical to the
organization as it looks to balance long-term strategic planning with short-term
production success. Aggregate planning involves some strategy such as inventory,
production rate, manpower needs, capacity, and other controllable variables. The
activities that use aggregate planning are a solid demand forecast covering the
medium-range period, financial planning surrounding the production cost which
includes raw material, labor, inventory planning, and organization policy around
labor and quality management.
This report will record all of the data from several method of aggregate planning.
The data was taken from previous report. The data is demand of production from
September 2017 until February 2018. Then, the data will be analyzed and the
conclusion can be taken to determine the best method to achieving a long-term
strategic planning with short-term production success.
1.2 Objectives
The objectives in this report are:
To match the production rate and the demand rate (sales forecast).
2.2
To determine the productive utilization of both human and equipment
resources.
To minimize the production cost.
To achieving a long-term strategic with short-term production success.
To minimize the changes in the workforce levels.
To minimize the changes in the production rates.
To maximize the utilization of the plant and the various equipment.
1.4 Steps
There are several steps to determine the data, which are:
2.3
CHAPTER II
LITERATURE STUDY
Aggregate planning can be used in determining the best path to meet predicted
demand by adjusting production values, labor rates, inventory levels, overtime
work, subcontract rates, and other controllable variables.
2.4
issues that may be more important than low cost. The strategic issues in
question include reducing employment level problems, reducing inventory
levels, or fulfilling a higher level of service. For manufacturing companies,
the aggregate schedule aims at connecting the company's strategic
objectives with the production plan, but for the service company, aggregate
scheduling aims to link targets to the worker's schedule.
Four things are required in aggregate planning:
A logical whole unit for measuring sales and output
Predicted demand for a viable medium-term planning period at the
aggregate time.
Methods to determine costs
Models that combine predictions and costs so scheduling decisions can
be made for the planning period
2.5
other companies. The consequence of this remission is the incidence of
subcontracting costs, which are usually more costly for subcontracting
than for self-production and the risk of contractor delivery.
6. Inventory-holding cost
The lost opportunity resulting from tying up money in finished goods
inventory plus the cost of space in which to store the finished goods.
Interest, space, taxes, insurance, obsolescence and other costs are
sometimes included in this cost.
7. Stock Out Cost
The expected losses result from failure to meet the demand for the
product.
If the customer merely waits for delivery – Backorders (the product is
returned)
If the customer goes elsewhere – lost sales (the product cannot sell
correctly. Example, bread because the expired date)
All of these are true planning strategies. These strategies involve inventory
manipulation, production values, level of labor, capacity, and other
controllable variables.
2.6
2.4.1 Capacity Options
A company may choose the following basic capacity (production)
options:
1. Change inventory levels
Managers can increase inventories during low demand periods to
meet high demand in the future.
2. Diversify the amount of labor
Dismissing or done by employing. One way to meet demand is to
employ or dismiss the production workers to adjust production
levels.
3. Diversify production levels through overtime or free time.
Sometimes labor can be kept constant by varying working hours,
reducing the number of hours worked when demand is low and
increasing hours of work as demand increases.
4. Subcontracting
A company can obtain temporary capacity by subcontracting
during periods of high demand.
5. The use of part-time employees
Especially in the service sector, part-time employees can fill the
needs of unskilled labor.
2.7
Backordering: Makes for the customer to agree to order for the
delivery of the order in case of a condition where the company
cannot fulfill the customer's request from the available
inventory.
𝑎 𝑖 𝑎
= 𝑖 (2-2)
𝑎 𝑖 𝑎 / 𝑎
𝑤 𝑘
2.8
2.5. Aggregate Planning Method
There are several techniques that operations managers use to develop more
useful and more appropriate aggregate plans, including:
2.9
2.6 Pattern/Production Policy
The pattern of production concerns the issue of the distribution of
production for a certain period of production (usually one year) into smaller
periods (example: semi-annual, quarterly or monthly).
Production patterns are required by companies that often experience
fluctuations in product sales resulting in fluctuations in initial inventory and
final product inventories. There are two kinds of patterns / production
policies are known, namely:
2.6.1 Constant Production
That is the distribution of products from yearly to monthly relatively
equal (constant) every month. With a pattern like this, there will be
or happen inventory. With the inventory, the shortage and excess
sales will be balanced by the advantages and disadvantages of
inventory.
Example:
The monthly production amounts to 1,500 units.
For example, in June it sold 1,350 units, meaning that the
company has a supply of 150 units.
In July the company was able to sell as many as 1,600 units,
while the company produced only 1,500 units. Lack of
production goods is covered or balanced from previous month's
inventories (150 units), meaning the company still has 50 units
of inventory.
And so on, the deficiency or excess of the sale is offset by an
excess or a shortage of inventory, except for certain
circumstances, for example when a demand occurs.
2.10
patterns, then in addition to the number of products produced will
rise and fall, also result in relatively stable inventory conditions.
When sales go up then production will go up as well. Meanwhile,
when sales go down then production will go down as well.
Example:
For example the production of a company of 1,500 units with
inventories of 100 units.
In June sales are estimated at 1,800 units, the company will
produce as many as 1,800 units.
In July, it is estimated that sales of 1,600 units will produce
1,600 units.
2.11
CHAPTER III
DATA COLLECTION
In this aggregate planning, the data of forecast demands are needed. From Module
1 : Forecasting, there are several forecasting methods used. The comparation of
analysis results are showed as belows.
Tracking
Verification Signal -
NO Method MAD MSE MAPE Test Brown
1 LPD 205,95 82700,16 15,32% Not Passed Passed
2 Arithmatic 185,39 63723,83 13,44% Not Passed Not Passed
3 SMA 195,71 77746,08 14,82% Not Passed Not Passed
4 WMA 183,90 78511,25 13,97% Not Passed Not Passed
5 DMA 254,90 134980,04 19,42% Not Passed Not Passed
6 SES 171,86 62485,27 12,75% Not Passed Passed
DES
7 BROWN 185,78 81944,59 14,14% Not Passed Passed
8 DES HOLT 207,71 90462,67 15,65% Not Passed Not Passed
9 CYCLIC 147,30 38241,02 10,24% Not Passed Not Passed
CONSTANT
10 LINEAR 166,73 49961,21 11,97% Not Passed Not Passed
CYCLIC
11 LINEAR 154,81 44280,00 11,11% Not Passed Not Passed
Lowest
Error 147,30 38241,02 10,24%
2.12
From the figure below, it is shown the probability plot of residual cyclic method.
The p-value is larger than 0.05, so do not reject Ho. It is mean that the data is
normal.
From the figure below, it showed that the data is independent (not correlated each
others). There will be a fast change in the signs of consecutive residuals.
2.13
From the figure below, it could be seen that all of standardized residual are between
2 and -2. It is not show any pattern. So, the data is normally distributed and has
constant variance.
From Module 1, it concluded that cyclic method are choosen as the best one
compared other method. The forecast demand data shown as belows.
Forecasted Demand
Month Sep-17 Oct-17 Nov-17 Dec-17 Jan-18 Feb-18
Demand 1428 1651 1689 1428 1651 1689
Other information are given from the case study, such as belows.
In every working days, there are two shifts. In each shift, there are 10 workers/shift-
day. Total workers available for each day are 20 workers.
2.14
On the Table 3.4., it is showed the number of working days from Sept 2017 until February
2018. It is based on Indonesia holidays calender. The calender are shown in the figure
belows.
Table 3.4. Number of Working Days from September 2017 until February 2018
2.15
Figure 3.4. Calender Sept 2017 – Feb 2018 (continued)
Some related data in order to analyze the aggregate planning, showed in the table
belows,
Table 3.6. Other Related Data
2.16
CHAPTER IV
DATA ANALYSIS
In this chapter, there will be master production schedule (MPS) in aggregate level
using several methods. Before we analyze and calculate the MPS, first the
production rate should be calculated first.
Table 4.1. Production Rate
The production rate is calculated using the formula belows. It is mean that in one
day, one worker can produce in average 2,23 units.
𝑊 𝑖 / 𝑖
𝑖 = = = ,
𝑖 / 𝑖 −
The master production schedule use forecast demand and analyzed by several
methods as belows.
4.1. Workforce/Chase Strategy
Workforce strategy is a strategy by hiring and firing workers and there are inventory
cost at the end of inventory. This method produce only enough goods to meet or
exactly match the demand for goods. Think of this strategy in terms of a restaurant,
which produces meals only when a customer orders, therefore matching the actual
production with customer demand.
In next page, there will be a table consist of how to calculate the production cost by
using workforce/chase strategy.
2.17
Table 4.2. Workforce/Chase Strategy
In order to get the worker needed, it could found by using formulas as belows. Example of workers needed for Sept 2017.
𝑖
𝑊 = = =
𝑖 /𝑊 ,
The demand required for Sept 2017 is calculated by minus demand with the beginning inventory (70 units), because the company can
use the beginning inventory to fulfill the demand. At the end of the Feb 2018, the demand required is calculated by adding demand
with ending inventory (100 units), because the company would like to fullfill expected ending inventory.
2.18
Table 4.3. Workforce/Chase Strategy (continued)
Worker available is known in the beginning that number of workers are 20 workers. To determine whether hire or laid off workers, so
the different between the worker needed and worker available calculated as belows. For example Sept 2017.
𝑖 𝑊 =𝑊 −𝑊 𝐴 𝑖
𝑖 𝑊 = − =
Because the worker needed is higher than workers available, so hire workers. If lower than workers available, so laid off workers.
2.19
Number of worker used is same with worker needed. Labor cost is calculated by
using formula as belows. Example for Sept 2017.
=𝑊 × /𝑊 ×
= × × = . .
𝑖
𝑖 =𝑊 × = × ,
𝑊
=
= 𝑖 − 𝑖
And then calculate the cumulative net inventory by adding with previous net
inventory. If the results of cumulative inventory is positive, so it is included in
holding cost. If the results of cumulative inventory is negative, so it is included in
backorder cost.
The total cost of each month could be calculated by adding hiring cost, layoff cost,
labor cost, holding cost, and backorder cost. Total cost by using Workforce/Chase
Strategy is IDR 669.910.000.
2.20
4.2. Inventory Strategy/ Strategy Level (No Overtime)
Strategy Level (No Overtime) is a method by choosing the highest number of
workers and remain same for all period. Assume here that there are not overtime
cost. Before calculate the cost, first the higher number of workers should be found
first. The calculation will be shown in the next page.
Months
Sep-17 Oct-17 Nov-17 Dec-17 Jan-18 Feb-18
Days / Month 24 26 26 23 25 23
Sum of Days 24 50 76 99 124 147
Demand 1358 1651 1689 1428 1651 1789
Sum of Demand 1358 3009 4698 6126 7777 9566
Workers 25,33 26,94 27,67 27,70 28,07 29,13
Round Up 26 27 28 28 29 30
𝑊 =
In this method, the highest number of workers is choosen. So, the number of
workers needed is 30.
To calculate the unit/worker, it use formula as belows. Example of units/worker
for Sept 2017.
𝑖 𝑖
= × = × , = ,
2.21
Table 4.5. Strategy Level (No Overtime)
Months Cost /
Total (worker or
Sep-17 Oct-17 Nov-17 Dec-17 Jan-18 Feb-18 unit or day)
1 Days 24 26 26 23 25 23 147
2 Units/worker/month 53,62 58,09 58,09 51,38 55,85 51,38 328,40
3 Demand 1428 1651 1689 1428 1651 1689 9536
4 Demand Required 1358 1651 1689 1428 1651 1789 9566
Cummulative
5 Demand 1358 3009 4698 6126 7777 9566 32534
6 Worker Needed 30 30 30 30 30 30 180
7 Workers Available 20 30 30 30 30 30 170
8 Workers Hired 10 0 0 0 0 0 10
IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR
Hiring Cost
9 25.000.000 - - - - - 25.000.000 2.500.000
10 Workers Laid Off 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The demand required for Sept 2017 is calculated by minus demand with the beginning inventory (70 units), because the company can
use the beginning inventory to fulfill the demand. At the end of the Feb 2018, the demand required is calculated by adding demand
with ending inventory (100 units), because the company would like to fullfill expected ending inventory.
Cumulative demand is calculated by adding the previous demand. Worker needed for all period are remain same, 30 workers.
2.22
Table 4.6. Strategy Level (No Overtime) (continued)
Worker available is known in the beginning that number of workers are 20 workers. To determine whether hire or laid off workers, so
the different between the worker needed and worker available calculated as belows. For example Sept 2017.
𝑖 𝑊 =𝑊 −𝑊 𝐴 𝑖
𝑖 𝑊 = − =
Because the worker needed is higher than workers available, so hire workers. If lower than workers available, so laid off workers.
2.23
Number of worker used is same with worker needed. Labor cost is calculated by
using formula as belows. Example for Sept 2017.
=𝑊 × /𝑊 ×
= × × = IDR . .
𝑖
𝑖 =𝑊 × = × ,
𝑊
=
= 𝑖 − 𝑖
And then calculate the cumulative net inventory by adding with previous net
inventory. If the results of cumulative inventory is positive, so it is included in
holding cost. If the results of cumulative inventory is negative, so it is included in
backorder cost.
The total cost of each month could be calculated by adding hiring cost, layoff cost,
labor cost, and holding cost. Total cost by using Inventory/Level Strategy (No
Overtime) is IDR 778.750.000.
2.24
4.3. Inventory Strategy/ Strategy Level (Overtime)
Strategy Level with Overtime is a method using average number of workers needed
for production and overtime is allowed to fulfill the uncovered demand. Before
calculate the total cost, first the number of workers should be defined as belows.
∑
𝑊 = = =
∑ 𝑖 /𝑊 ,
In this method, the number of workers are remain same for all periods, 29 workers.
2.25
Table 4.7. Strategy Level (Overtime)
The demand required for Sept 2017 is calculated by minus demand with the beginning inventory (70 units), because the company can
use the beginning inventory to fulfill the demand. At the end of the Feb 2018, the demand required is calculated by adding demand
with ending inventory (100 units), because the company would like to fullfill expected ending inventory.
2.26
Table 4.8. Strategy Level (Overtime) (continued)
𝑖 𝑊 =𝑊 −𝑊 𝐴 𝑖
𝑖 𝑊 = − =
Because the worker needed is higher than workers available, so hire workers. If lower than workers available, so laid off workers
2.27
Number of worker used is same with worker needed. Labor cost is calculated by
using formula as belows. Example for Sept 2017.
=𝑊 × /𝑊 ×
= × × = IDR . .
𝑖
𝑖 =𝑊 × = × ,
𝑊
=
= 𝑖 − 𝑖
And then calculate the cumulative net inventory by adding with previous net
inventory. If the results of cumulative inventory is positive, so it is included in
holding cost. If the results of cumulative inventory is negative, so it is included in
backorder cost.
𝑖
𝑖 = × 𝑖 / 𝑖
𝑖
The total cost of each month could be calculated by adding hiring cost, layoff cost,
labor cost, holding cost, and overtime cost. Total cost by using Inventory/Level
Strategy (Overtime) is IDR 653.295.000.
2.28
4.4. Transportation
Transportation Method is one of a type of linear programming problem that may be
solved using a simplified version of the simplex technique.
In this case study, assumed that the maximum overtime hour per worker in a day is
3 hours and the cycle time is already known which is 188 minutes. So, the
production rate of overtime is as belows.
𝑖
𝑖 ,
𝑖 = ℎ × =
𝑖
, 𝑖
= /ℎ
2.29
Table 4.10 The Available Over Time Capacity
Oct
Days Sep-17 Nov-17 Dec 17 Jan-18 Feb-18
17
Working
24 26 26 23 25 23
Days
Number of
20 20 20 20 20 20
Worker
Number of
480 520 520 460 500 460
Worker/Month
Available OT
Capacity 460 498 498 440 479 440
(units)
The available of Subcontract is assumed same as Overtime. And then, next calculate
the cost per unit as belows.
Table 4.11 The Production Cost for RT, OT, and SC
The cost of RT, OT, and SC are calculated by using formula as belows.
𝑖
=
2.30
Table 4.12 Transportation Model
Month Month
Sep-17 Oct-17 Nov-17 Dec-17 Jan-18 Feb-18
Month Demand RT OT SC RT OT SC RT OT SC RT OT SC RT OT SC RT OT SC
1072 460 460 1162 498 498 1162 498 498 1028 440 440 1117 479 479 1028 440 440
Capacity 1072 460 460
Cost 58190 94000 156667
Sep-17 1358 Plan 1072 286
Capacity 1162 498 498
Cost 133190 169000 231667 58190 94000 156667
Oct-17 1651 Plan 1162 489
Capacity 1162 498 498
Cost 208190 244000 306667 133190 169000 231667 58190 94000 156667
Nov-17 1689 Plan 1162 498 29
Capacity 1028 440 440
Cost 283190 319000 381667 208190 244000 306667 133190 169000 231667 58190 94000 156667
Dec-17 1428 Plan 1028 400
Capacity 1117 479 479
Cost 133190 169000 231667 58190 94000 156667
Jan-18 1651 Plan 1117 479 55
Capacity 1028 440 440
Cost 133190 169000 231667 58190 94000 156667
Feb-18 1789 Plan 1028 440 321
Total Used 1072 286 1162 489 1162 498 29 1028 400 1117 479 55 1028 440 321
2.31
In the transportation model, the demand will be allocated into the capacity of RT
(regular time), OT (over time), SC (subcontract). The order to meet each capacity
is based on the lowest cost. Usually, RT is the lowest cost followed with OT, and
the highest cost is SC. But, when there’s capacity in other month that have lower
cost after include the holding cost and still have enough capacity, it can be filled
before filled the capacity with higher cost.
In the first month which is September 2017, the demand are 1358 units. In order to
maximize the capacity utilization with the minimum cost, so the RT (regular time)
capacity will be maximized up to 1072 units with the cost is IDR 58.190 (the lowest
cost between RT, OT, and SC in September) and the rest units that must be allocated
are 286 units. After the capacity of RT already full, the rest units will be allocated
into the OT (over time) rather than SC (subcontract), because the cost per unit in
OT is lower than SC and the capacity of OT is enough up to 460 units.
In October 2017, the demand are 1651 units. The first capacity that must be fulfilled
is RT in October 2017, which is it have the lowest cost per unit. But, because the
capacity of RT is 1162 units, the rest units which are 489 units will be allocated into
the OT capacity that can be filled up to 498 units. The reason why the 489 units
must be allocated into the OT is because the cost per unit in OT is lower than by
using SC.
In November 2017, the demand are 1689 units. Actually, the capacity and the cost
of RT, OT, and SC in this month is same with the previous month, October 2017.
So, the RT capacity will be full for 1162 units. The rest demand that must be
allocated are 527 units. Because of the OT capacity as the second lowest-cost only
for 498 units, so after filled the OT capacity then SC capacity in November 2017
must be used for the other 29 units.
In December 2017, the demand are 1428 units. In order to maximize the capacity
utilization with the minimum cost, so the RT (regular time) capacity will be
maximized up to 1028 units with the cost is IDR 58.190 (the lowest cost between
RT, OT, and SC in December) and the rest units that must be allocated are 400
2.32
units. After the capacity of RT already full, the rest units will be allocated into the
OT (over time) rather than SC (subcontract), because the cost per unit in OT is
lower than SC and the capacity of OT is enough up to 440 units.
After the new year 2018, the demand in January 2018 are 1651 units which is same
with the demand in October 2017. As always like the 4 months before, the first
capacity that must be fulfilled is RT which is it have the lowest cost per unit. But,
because the capacity of RT is 1117 units, the rest units which are 534 units will be
allocated into the second lowest-cost which is OT capacity that can be filled up to
479 units. Where the rest still 55 units are allocated into the SC in January 2018.
In February 2018, the demand that must be fulfilled are 1789 units. Actually, the
capacity and the cost of RT, OT, and SC in this month is same with December 2017.
So, the RT capacity will be full for 1028 units. The rest demand that must be
allocated are 761 units. Because of the OT capacity as the second lowest-cost only
for 440 units, so after filled the OT capacity then SC capacity in February 2018
must be used for the other 321 units.
After the demand, available capacity until the total of production in RT, OT, and
SC in the table 4.12 already determined, then the MPS can be seen in the table
4.13. When the demand in September 2017 are 1358 units, and the available
capacity of RT is only for 1072 units, then the production is planned to allocate the
2.33
1072 units into the RT, and the rest is 286 units is allocated into the OT. Actually,
this MPS is just like the summary of the transportation model in the table 4.12. But,
in this MPS, the total of units in each RT, OT, SC, and ending inventory can be
determined in order to calculate the production cost. It can be seen on the table
below.
Based on the table 4.14, the company will get cost about IDR 382.200.000 for
using regular time to make 6568 units. Where the cost of OT and SC are IDR
243.648.000 and IDR 63.450.000 in order to make 2592 units by using OT and 405
units by using SC. In the ending inventory, the company will save 100 units to hold.
So, the holding cost that the company must pay is IDR 7.500.000. In the end, the
total cost if the company using the transportation model will be IDR 696.798.000.
2.34
𝑊 = = = ,
𝑖 ,
𝑖 ℎ
𝑖 𝑖
= × = × , = ,
Actually for the zero inventory strategy, the worker needed will be round up which
is 26 workers. But, there must be some units in the inventory that caused more
holding cost. If the company use over time but just using 25 workers, and compare
with the total cost if the company using 26 workers, the comparison is like on the
table below.
As the table 4.15 shown above, the company can press the cost around IDR
6.628.000 if use 25 workers. That is why in this mixed strategy, the number of
worker will be round down except for December 2017. The analysis of the rest
month except December 2017 are same like September 2017 for the round down
reason.
2.35
Table 4.16 Mixed Strategy Model
2.36
The table 4.16 shows for September 2017, the workers that will be needed are 25
workers as the calculation in the table 4.15 already shown. The net inventory after
using regular time is -18, which is lack of 18 units to achieve the demand. So, the
company will use over time to handle it. The formula to find how long in hour to
make 18 units is on the below.
∗ . 𝑖 𝑖
𝑖 =
𝑖
∗ 𝑖
𝑖 = = . ℎ
𝑖
In this company, the over time each day is assumed to be 3 hours. Thus, if the
company asks their all of their workers to do the over time, then the 18 units will
be finished in a day. But, the cost will be calculated as much as the over time hour
that needed to make 18 units, so the OT cost is :
.
= . ℎ = . .
ℎ
As all of the calculation in September 2017 is already explained, the rest following
months calculation will be same. But in the table 4.16, there is 1 month that the
number of workers is round up (the cells with orange color). The number of
workers in December 2017 is round up because these consideration :
December 2017
If the company use over time but just using 27 workers, and compare with the total
cost if the company using 28 workers, the comparison is like on the table below.
2.37
Table 4.17 Comparison Between 27 Workers and 28 Workers in December 2017
As the table 4.17 shown above, the company can press the cost around IDR
5.131.358 if use 28 workers. That is why the compony will use 28 workers in
December 2017.
The inventory from December 2017 are 10 units. In order to minimize the demand
in the January 2018 that can caused the number of worker too, so the 10 units will
be allocated for January 2018. That is why the company just produce 1641 units,
not 1651 units. In the end based on table 4.16, the total cost if the company using
the mixed strategy will be IDR 611.568.000.
2.38
4.6. Stable
Stable strategy is a method using smallest workers and stable, no inventory cost.
Since there are not inventory cost used and number of workers are stable, so
overtime cost is used. Before calculate the total production cost, number of workers
needed should be found.
Months
Sep-17 Oct-17 Nov-17 Dec-17 Jan-18 Feb-18
Days /
Month 24 26 26 23 25 23
Sum of Days 24 50 76 99 124 147
Demand 1358 1651 1689 1428 1651 1789
Sum of
Demand 1358 3009 4698 6126 7777 9566
Workers 25,33 26,94 27,67 27,70 28,07 29,13
Round Up 26 27 28 28 29 30
𝑊 =
In this method, the lowest number of workers is choosen. So, the number of workers
needed is 26.
To calculate the unit/worker, it use formula as belows. Example of units/worker
for Sept 2017.
𝑖 𝑖
= × = × , = ,
2.39
Table 4.19 Stable Level
The demand required for Sept 2017 is calculated by minus demand with the beginning inventory (70 units), because the company can
use the beginning inventory to fulfill the demand. At the end of the Feb 2018, the demand required is calculated by adding demand
with ending inventory (100 units), because the company would like to fullfill expected ending inventory.
Cumulative demand is calculated by adding the previous demand. Worker needed for all period are remain same, 26 workers.
2.40
Table 4.19 Stable Level (continued)
Workers
11 Used 26 26 26 26 26 26 156
IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR
12
Labor Cost
81.120.000 87.880.000 87.880.000 77.740.000 84.500.000 77.740.000 496.860.000 130.000
Units
13 Produced 1394,04 1510,21 1510,21 1335,96 1452,13 1335,96 8538,51
14 Round Down 1394 1510 1510 1335 1452 1335 8538
Different
15 Demand 36 141 179 93 199 454 1102
IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR
Holding Cost
16 - - - - - - - 75.000
Overtime IDR
17 Hour 112,80 441,80 560,87 291,40 623,53 1422,53 3452,933333 30.000
Overtime IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR
18 Cost 3.384.000 13.254.000 16.826.000 8.742.000 18.706.000 42.676.000 103.588.000
IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR IDR
19
Total Cost 99.504.000 101.134.000 104.706.000 86.482.000 103.206.000 120.416.000 615.448.000
Worker available is known in the beginning that number of workers are 20 workers. To determine whether hire or laid off workers, so
the different between the worker needed and worker available calculated as belows. For example Sept 2017.
𝑖 𝑊 =𝑊 −𝑊 𝐴 𝑖
𝑖 𝑊 = − =
Because the worker needed is higher than workers available, so hire workers. If lower than workers available, so laid off workers
2.41
Number of worker used is same with worker needed. Labor cost is calculated by
using formula as belows. Example for Sept 2017.
=𝑊 × /𝑊 ×
= × × = IDR . .
𝑖
𝑖 =𝑊 × = × ,
𝑊
=
𝑖 = 𝑖 − 𝑖
And then calculate the cumulative net inventory by adding with previous net
inventory. If the results of cumulative inventory is positive, so it is included in
holding cost. If the results of cumulative inventory is negative, so it is included in
backorder cost.
𝑖
𝑖 = × 𝑖 / 𝑖
𝑖
The total cost of each month could be calculated by adding hiring cost, layoff cost,
labor cost, and holding cost. Total cost by using Stable Strategy is IDR
615.448.000.
2.42
4.7. Zero Inventory
Zero inventory is a method by having zero inventory in each period. The current
demand will use the net inventory before period in order to minimize cost. But if
the net inventory is negative, it is mean that the production does not achieve
demand, so that is overcomed by overtime.
The workers needed is calculated by formula as belows. Example for Sept 2017.
𝑊 = = =
𝑖 ,
𝑖 ℎ
2.43
Table 4.20 Zero Inventory Level
The demand required for Sept 2017 is calculated by minus demand with the beginning inventory (70 units), because the company can
use the beginning inventory to fulfill the demand. At the end of the Feb 2018, the demand required is calculated by adding demand
with ending inventory (100 units), because the company would like to fullfill expected ending inventory. Net demand is calculated by
suctracting the current demand with previous net inventory (positive). At the end of Feb 2018, there will be holding cost since it become
expected ending inventory.
2.44
Table 4.21 Zero Inventory Level (continued)
Worker available is known in the beginning that number of workers are 20 workers. To determine whether hire or laid off workers, so
the different between the worker needed and worker available calculated as belows. For example Sept 2017.
𝑖 𝑊 =𝑊 −𝑊 𝐴 𝑖
𝑖 𝑊 = − =
Because the worker needed is higher than workers available, so hire workers. If lower than workers available, so laid off workers
2.45
Number of worker used is same with worker needed. Labor cost is calculated by
using formula as belows. Example for Sept 2017.
=𝑊 × /𝑊 ×
= × × = IDR . .
𝑖
𝑖 =𝑊 × = × ,
𝑊
=
= 𝑖 − 𝑖
The total cost of each month could be calculated by adding hiring cost, layoff cost,
labor cost, and holding cost. Total cost by using Zero Inventory is IDR 615.825.000.
From Module 1 : Forecasting, the best forecast demand is cyclic method. In order
to make master production schedule, there are seven methods conducted, such as
Workforce/Chase Strategy, Strategy Level (No Overtime), Strategy Level
(Overtime), Transportation Method, Mixed, Stable, and Zero Inventory. After
calculated using each method, the results are shown as belows.
2.46
From Table 4.22, it could be concluded that Mixed strategy as the best one, with
lowest cost, which is IDR 611.568.000. This method give efficiency and
effectiveness for production.
After the best method are choosen, so the master production schedule could be
determined as belows.
Mix strategy is considered as the best method in terms of minimizing the total cost
in order to achieve effectiveness and efficiency.
2.47
CHAPTER V
CONCLUSION
Aggregate Planning (AP) is an operational activity to determine the amount and
time of production in the future. Aggregate Planning is also defined as an attempt
to match the supply and demand of a product or service by determining the exact
amount and timing of input, transformation, and output.
From this report, it could be concluded that Mixed strategy as the best one, with
lowest cost, which is IDR 611.568.000. This method give efficiency and
effectiveness for production.
2.48
REFERENCE
Sipper, D., & Bulfin. JR, R. L. (1997). Production : Planning, Control, and
Integration. New York City: McGraw Hill Education.
2.49
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER I ......................................................................................................... 3.2
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... 3.2
1.1 Background ........................................................................................... 3.2
1.2 Objectives ................................................................................................... 3.3
1.3 Tools and Equipment(s) ............................................................................. 3.3
1.4 Steps ........................................................................................................... 3.3
CHAPTER II ........................................................................................................ 3.4
LITERATURE STUDY ....................................................................................... 3.4
2.1 Definition of Capacity ................................................................................ 3.4
2.2 Type of Capacity ........................................................................................ 3.5
2.3 Definition of Capacity Planning ................................................................ 3.5
2.4 Measure of Capacity .................................................................................. 3.6
2.5 Resource Planning ...................................................................................... 3.8
2.6 Capacity Bills (Bill of Labor Approach) .................................................... 3.8
2.6.1 Product Structure..................................................................................... 3.8
2.6.2 Bill of Materials ...................................................................................... 3.8
2.7 Procedure of Capacity Bills ....................................................................... 3.9
CHAPTER III .................................................................................................... 3.10
DATA COLLECTION....................................................................................... 3.10
CHAPTER IV .................................................................................................... 3.15
DATA ANALYSIS ............................................................................................ 3.15
4.1. Routing Data ........................................................................................... 3.15
4.2. Bill of Capacity ....................................................................................... 3.16
4.3. Total Required Capacity ......................................................................... 3.16
4.4. Available Capacity .................................................................................. 3.19
4.5. Comparing Available Capacity with Required Capacity ........................ 3.38
CHAPTER V...................................................................................................... 3.84
CONCLUSION .................................................................................................. 3.84
REFERENCE ..................................................................................................... 3.85
3.1
CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background
The production system design planning considers input requirements, conversion
process and output. After considering the forecast and long-term planning, the
organization should undertake the capacity planning. Capacity Planning is
determining the level of capacity needed to achieve scheduled production that
comparing with the available capacity and planning necessary adjustments in
capacity levels or schedules. Capacity planning plays an important role decision-
making process, example: for extension of existing operations, modification to
product lines, starting new products, etc.
The ultimate goal of capacity planning is to meet the current and future level of
requirement at a minimal wastage. The benefits of capacity planning are maximize
the utilization, get the real time data (accurate information on team availability for
more chance of on time delivery), get the better planning (know the demand for
resources plan for it), help the employee to avoid the task clashes and avoid burnout,
and organize the good time (know what’s coming up and prioritize what’s
important).
3.2
This report will record all the step based on the data’s problem. The data will be
analyzed and the conclusion can be taken to comparing the available capacity with
the required capacity (to know the capacity is fulfill the demand).
1.2 Objectives
The objectives in this report are:
1.4 Steps
There are several steps to analyze the data, which are:
Calculate the routing data to producing product X
Calculate the Bill of Resources product X in each workstation
Calculate the total required capacity
Calculate the available capacity
Compare the required capacity and available capacity
Find solutions to make the available capacity and required capacity become
balance.
3.3
CHAPTER II
LITERATURE STUDY
From the definition can be concluded that capacity is the level of the ability of a
company to produce a good or service supported by the availability of facilities in
the form of labor and equipment, and usually stated in the amount of output that
can be produced for a certain period of time.
3.4
2.2 Type of Capacity
In production and operations management, there are three types of capacities:
Potential Capacity
Capacity that can be formed to help leaders to makes decision. This is the
core of long-term decisions that will not be affected by production
management per day.
Immediate Capacity
The quantity of production capacity that can be formed becomes available in
a short period of time. This is the maximum capacity of the Potential capacity
(assumed to be used productively).
Effective capacity
Effective capacity is an important concept. Not all production capacities can
actually be used or wasted. It is important for a production manager to see
whether, the actual capacity can be achieved. The difference between the
capacity of an organization and the demand of all the customers is about
inefficiency, as well as the source cannot be used or cannot be met by the
customer. The demand for an organization's capacity varies based on changes
in available products, such as the increase and decrease in the quantity of
production of the product available, or create new products. The best use of
available capacity can meet renewal in overall equipment effectiveness
(OEE). Capacity can be increased through the introduction of new techniques,
equipment and materials, the addition of the number of labors or machinery,
increasing the number of hours worked, or the provision of production
facilities.
3.5
combining of technologies, or a rearrangement of equipment and processes.
Capacity planning normally involves the following activities
𝑖
ℎ = 𝑖 (2-1)
𝑖
Direct time study, in which the time study analyst observes an operator
performing the task a number of times, records the time taken, and rates the
performances.
3.6
Predetermined motion time data, where the analyst divides the task into
elements and then applies a standard time to each element as specified in
commercially tables such as MTM (Motion Time Measurement) or work
factor.
Standard data, which is similar to predetermined motion time data except
that the tables are developed internally, usually based on production of
similar parts or products.
Work sampling, which is similar to direct time study except the analyst,
instead of observing an operator continuously, observes one or more
operation number of times at randomly selected intervals.
Two system performance measurements usually useful are Utilization and
Efficiency. Utilization is the percentage of design capacity that has actually been
achieved. Meanwhile, Efficiency is the percentage of effective capacity that has
actually been achieved. How the facility is used and managed will determine
whether it is difficult to achieve 100% efficiency. Operations managers tend to be
evaluated at their level of efficiency.
ℎ
𝑖𝑖 𝑖 = (2-2)
ℎ 𝑖
The number of hours actually worked may be leas that the available hours
because of such factors as machine downtime and absenteeism.
ℎ
𝑖 𝑖 = ℎ
(2-3)
3.7
2.5 Resource Planning
Resource planning determines the resources needed to produce the production
plan. The resource plan has the longest planning horizon of all the capacity
planning activities. It extend put as far as the production plan, typically five years.
Time buckets are months or quarters, and the plan is revised monthly or quarterly.
The function of resource planning is to make the optimal usage of resources and
get the optimal benefit and to provide a basis for planning for planning long lead
time change in capacity. The techniques used in resource planning are capacity
planning factors and bills of capacity.
3.8
engineer to determine the tem to be purchased or produced. Production and
inventory control planning uses BOMs that are linked to the master production
schedule, to determine which release items are purchased or produced. The
meaning of X/Y is X unit of component or raw material needed to manufacture Y
unit production in the previous level.
𝑖
𝐻= 𝐸
𝑖 (2-4)
3.9
CHAPTER III
DATA COLLECTION
In this capacity planning, the data of master production schedule (MPS) are needed.
From Module 2 : Aggregate Planning, there are several aggregate planning
methods used. The comparation of analysis results are showed as belows.
From Table 3.1, it could be concluded that Mixed strategy as the best one, with
lowest cost, which is IDR 611.568.000. This method give efficiency and
effectiveness for production.
After the best method are choosen, so the master production schedule could be
determined as belows.
Months
Sep-17 Oct-17 Nov-17 Dec-17 Jan-18 Feb-18
Days 24 26 26 23 25 23
Unit Produced
1340 1626 1684 1438 1619 1747
of RT/month
Unit Produced
18 25 5 0 22 42
of OT/month
Total Unit
1358 1651 1689 1438 1641 1789
Produced
3.10
Table 3.3. Unit Produced / Day in Each Month
Months
Sep-17 Oct-17 Nov-17 Dec-17 Jan-18 Feb-18
Unit
Produced 56,58 63,50 64,96 62,52 65,64 77,78
/ Day
Unit Produced/Day is calculated by dividing total unit produced with total days in
a month. After that, multiplying the unit produced/day with total days in a week to
get unit produced/week, result showed in Table 3.4.
Table 3.4. Unit Produced / Week
3.11
On the Table 3.5., it is showed the number of working days from Sept 2017 until
February 2018. It is based on Indonesia holidays calender. The calender are shown
in the figure belows.
Table 3.5. Number of Working Days from September 2017 until February 2018
3.12
Figure 3.2. Calender Jan 2018 – Feb 2018
Information about the holiday name are showed as belows. In the holiday days, it
is mean that the production process do not works.
Table 3.6. Holiday Name
Some related data in order to analyze the capacity planning, such as product
structure and routing data as belows.
3.13
In order to make the capacity planning, data such as run time, set up time, and EPQ
are needed to analyze and create the RCCP. So, below are shown the routing data.
3.14
CHAPTER IV
DATA ANALYSIS
𝑖
𝐻= + 𝑖
𝐻= + , = , 𝑖
𝐻= 𝐻× 𝑖
3.15
Table 4.1. Routing Data (continued)
E 102 10 0,72 20 1,22 28 34,16
104 10 0,6 20 1,10 28 30,80
107 15 0,48 20 1,23 28 34,44
108 0 0,81 20 0,81 28 22,68
F 101 10 1,5 25 1,90 2 3,80
104 10 1,36 25 1,76 2 3,52
105 30 2,1 25 3,30 2 6,60
106 15 1,1 25 1,70 2 3,40
108 0 1,45 25 1,45 2 2,90
𝑖 = / 𝑖 × 𝑖 /
3.16
Table 4.3. Total Required Capacity
Work Center
Week
Assembly Inspection 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
Week 1 475,20 633,60 7709,33 21574,08 2805,00 21212,40 3564,00 7500,24 18687,24 10129,68
Week 2 406,80 542,40 6599,65 18468,72 2401,25 18159,10 3051,00 6420,66 15997,41 8671,62
Week 3 339,60 452,80 5509,44 15417,84 2004,58 15159,37 2547,00 5360,02 13354,77 7239,14
Week 4 406,80 542,40 6599,65 18468,72 2401,25 18159,10 3051,00 6420,66 15997,41 8671,62
Week 5 457,20 609,60 7417,31 20756,88 2698,75 20408,90 3429,00 7216,14 17979,39 9745,98
Week 6 457,20 609,60 7417,31 20756,88 2698,75 20408,90 3429,00 7216,14 17979,39 9745,98
Week 7 457,20 609,60 7417,31 20756,88 2698,75 20408,90 3429,00 7216,14 17979,39 9745,98
Week 8 457,20 609,60 7417,31 20756,88 2698,75 20408,90 3429,00 7216,14 17979,39 9745,98
Week 9 464,40 619,20 7534,12 21083,76 2741,25 20730,30 3483,00 7329,78 18262,53 9899,46
Week 10 468,00 624,00 7592,52 21247,20 2762,50 20891,00 3510,00 7386,60 18404,10 9976,20
Week 11 468,00 624,00 7592,52 21247,20 2762,50 20891,00 3510,00 7386,60 18404,10 9976,20
Week 12 468,00 624,00 7592,52 21247,20 2762,50 20891,00 3510,00 7386,60 18404,10 9976,20
Week 13 386,40 515,20 6268,70 17542,56 2280,83 17248,47 2898,00 6098,68 15195,18 8236,76
Week 14 450,00 600,00 7300,50 20430,00 2656,25 20087,50 3375,00 7102,50 17696,25 9592,50
Week 15 450,00 600,00 7300,50 20430,00 2656,25 20087,50 3375,00 7102,50 17696,25 9592,50
Week 16 450,00 600,00 7300,50 20430,00 2656,25 20087,50 3375,00 7102,50 17696,25 9592,50
Week 17 300,00 400,00 4867,00 13620,00 1770,83 13391,67 2250,00 4735,00 11797,50 6395,00
Week 18 315,60 420,80 5120,08 14328,24 1862,92 14088,03 2367,00 4981,22 12410,97 6727,54
Week 19 472,80 630,40 7670,39 21465,12 2790,83 21105,27 3546,00 7462,36 18592,86 10078,52
Week 20 472,80 630,40 7670,39 21465,12 2790,83 21105,27 3546,00 7462,36 18592,86 10078,52
Week 21 472,80 630,40 7670,39 21465,12 2790,83 21105,27 3546,00 7462,36 18592,86 10078,52
Week 22 516,00 688,00 8371,24 23426,40 3045,83 23033,67 3870,00 8144,20 20291,70 10999,40
3.17
Table 4.3. Total Required Capacity (continued)
Week 23 560,40 747,20 9091,56 25442,16 3307,92 25015,63 4203,00 8844,98 22037,73 11945,86
Week 24 466,80 622,40 7573,05 21192,72 2755,42 20837,43 3501,00 7367,66 18356,91 9950,62
Week 25 560,40 747,20 9091,56 25442,16 3307,92 25015,63 4203,00 8844,98 22037,73 11945,86
Week 26 279,60 372,80 4536,04 12693,84 1650,42 12481,03 2097,00 4413,02 10995,27 5960,14
For example to calculate the week 1 in workstation assembly, it is calculated bu formula as belows.
𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 = × = , × = , 𝑖
To spread the number of workers to each workstation, the proportion is used between the workstation as belows.
Table 4.4. Proportion in Each Work Center
Work Center
Assembly Inspection 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
TOTAL 11479,20 15305,60 186230,89 521155,68 67759,17 512418,73 86094,00 181180,04 451419,54 244698,28
PROPORTION 0,01 0,01 0,08 0,23 0,03 0,22 0,04 0,08 0,20 0,11
3.18
4.4. Available Capacity
In calculating the available capacity, first the number of workers in each
workstation should be determined first. Below are the calculations.
Months
Sep-17 Oct-17 Nov-17 Dec-17 Jan-18 Feb-18
Workers
25 28 29 28 29 34
Needed
Regular
Time/day/shift 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0
(hour)
Over
Time/day 3,00 3,00 3,00 3,00 3,00 3,00
(hour)
In Table 4.7., the number of workers are divided into 2 shifts as belows.
Table 4.6. Number of Workers in Each Shift
Below are proportions in each workstation. In order to get number of workers (for
RT) in each workstation, the proportion will be mulplied by total number of workers
in a month. And then, number of workers (for OT) in each workstation, the
proportion will be mulplied by number of workers in shift 2 in a month.
Work Center Assembly Inspection 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
Proportion 0,01 0,01 0,08 0,23 0,03 0,22 0,04 0,08 0,20 0,11
3.19
Table 4.7. Number of Workers in Each Workstation/Month
Type of
Period Assembly Inspection 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 Total
Time\WC
Sep-17 Reguler Time 1 1 2 5 1 5 1 2 5 2 25
Over Time 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 13
Oct-17 Reguler Time 1 1 2 6 1 6 1 2 6 2 28
Over Time 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 14
Nov-17 Reguler Time 1 1 2 6 1 6 1 2 6 3 29
Over Time 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 15
Dec-17 Reguler Time 1 1 2 6 1 6 1 2 6 2 28
Over Time 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 14
Jan-18 Reguler Time 1 1 2 6 1 6 1 2 6 3 29
Over Time 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 15
Feb-18 Reguler Time 1 1 3 7 1 7 1 3 7 3 34
Over Time 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 17
For example, to calculate regular time and overtime for assembly, the calculation as belows.
𝑊 𝑖 𝑖 = 𝑖 × Total number of workers
𝑊 𝑖 𝑖 = , × = , =
𝑊 𝑖 𝑖 = 𝑖 × umber of workers in Shift
𝑊 𝑖 𝑖 = , × = , =
Next, determining the total available capacity in each workstation. There are 10 workstation and the calculations of total minutes in
each workstation as belows.
3.20
Assembly
Below are show the total available capacity (minutes) in assembly workstation. The total available capacity calculated by formula as
belows. For example, the week 1 in Sept 17, the calculation is as belows.
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 =𝑊 × 𝑊 ×𝐻 + 𝑊 ×𝐻 × 𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 = × × + × × 𝑖 = 𝑖
Table 4.8. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in Assembly Workstation
3.21
Table 4.8. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in Assembly Workstation (continued)
Inspection
Below are show the total available capacity (minutes) in inspection workstation. The total available capacity calculated by formula as
belows. For example, the week 1 in Sept 17, the calculation is as belows.
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 =𝑊 × 𝑊 ×𝐻 + 𝑊 ×𝐻 × 𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 = × × + × × 𝑖 = 𝑖
3.22
Table 4.9. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in Inspection Workstation
3.23
Table 4.9. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in Inspection Workstation (continued)
23 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
24 5 1 7 1 3 50 3000
Feb-18
25 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
26 3 1 7 1 3 30 1800
WC 101
Below are show the total available capacity (minutes) in 101 workstation. The total available capacity calculated by formula as belows.
For example, the week 1 in Sept 17, the calculation is as belows.
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 =𝑊 × 𝑊 ×𝐻 + 𝑊 ×𝐻 × 𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 = × × + × × 𝑖 = 𝑖
3.24
Table 4.10. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in 101 Workstation (continued)
Oct-17 (2) & Nov-17
9 6 2 7 2 3 120 7200
(4)
10 6 2 7 2 3 120 7200
Nov-17 11 6 2 7 2 3 120 7200
12 6 2 7 2 3 120 7200
Nov-17 (4) & Dec-17
13 5 2 7 2 3 100 6000
(1)
14 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
15 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
Dec-17
16 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
17 4 2 7 1 3 68 4080
18 4 2 7 2 3 80 4800
19 6 2 7 2 3 120 7200
Jan-18
20 6 2 7 2 3 120 7200
21 6 2 7 2 3 120 7200
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18 (3) 22 6 3 7 2 3 162 9720
23 6 3 7 1 3 144 8640
24 5 3 7 1 3 120 7200
Feb-18
25 6 3 7 1 3 144 8640
26 3 3 7 1 3 72 4320
WC 102
Below are show the total available capacity (minutes) in 101 workstation. The total available capacity calculated by formula as belows.
For example, the week 1 in Sept 17, the calculation is as belows.
3.25
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 =𝑊 × 𝑊 ×𝐻 + 𝑊 ×𝐻 × 𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 = × × + × × 𝑖 = 𝑖
3.26
Table 4.11. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in 102 Workstation (continued)
18 4 6 7 2 3 192 11520
19 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
Jan-18
20 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
21 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18 (3) 22 6 7 7 3 3 348 20880
23 6 7 7 3 3 348 20880
24 5 7 7 3 3 290 17400
Feb-18
25 6 7 7 3 3 348 20880
26 3 7 7 3 3 174 10440
WC 103
Below are show the total available capacity (minutes) in 101 workstation. The total available capacity calculated by formula as belows.
For example, the week 1 in Sept 17, the calculation is as belows.
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 =𝑊 × 𝑊 ×𝐻 + 𝑊 ×𝐻 × 𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 = × × + × × 𝑖 = 𝑖
3.27
Table 4.12. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in 103 Workstation (continued)
4 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
5 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
6 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
Oct-17
7 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
8 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
Oct-17 (2) & Nov-17 (4) 9 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
10 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
Nov-17 11 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
12 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
Nov-17 (4) & Dec-17 (1) 13 5 1 7 1 3 50 3000
14 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
15 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
Dec-17
16 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
17 4 1 7 1 3 40 2400
18 4 1 7 1 3 40 2400
19 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
Jan-18
20 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
21 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18 (3) 22 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
23 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
24 5 1 7 1 3 50 3000
Feb-18
25 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
26 3 1 7 1 3 30 1800
3.28
WC 104
Below are show the total available capacity (minutes) in 101 workstation. The total available capacity calculated by formula as belows.
For example, the week 1 in Sept 17, the calculation is as belows.
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 =𝑊 × 𝑊 ×𝐻 + 𝑊 ×𝐻 × 𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 = × × + × × 𝑖 = 𝑖
3.29
Table 4.13. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in 104 Workstation (continued)
Nov-17 (4) & Dec-17
13 5 6 7 2 3 240 14400
(1)
14 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
15 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
Dec-17
16 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
17 4 6 7 2 3 192 11520
18 4 6 7 2 3 192 11520
19 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
Jan-18
20 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
21 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18
22 6 7 7 3 3 348 20880
(3)
23 6 7 7 3 3 348 20880
24 5 7 7 3 3 290 17400
Feb-18
25 6 7 7 3 3 348 20880
26 3 7 7 3 3 174 10440
WC 105
Below are show the total available capacity (minutes) in 101 workstation. The total available capacity calculated by formula as belows.
For example, the week 1 in Sept 17, the calculation is as belows.
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 =𝑊 × 𝑊 ×𝐻 + 𝑊 ×𝐻 × 𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 = × × + × × 𝑖 = 𝑖
3.30
Table 4.14. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in 105 Workstation
3.31
Table 4.14. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in 105 Workstation (continued)
21 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18
22 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
(3)
23 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
24 5 1 7 1 3 50 3000
Feb-18
25 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600
26 3 1 7 1 3 30 1800
WC 106
Below are show the total available capacity (minutes) in 101 workstation. The total available capacity calculated by formula as belows.
For example, the week 1 in Sept 17, the calculation is as belows.
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 =𝑊 × 𝑊 ×𝐻 + 𝑊 ×𝐻 × 𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 = × × + × × 𝑖 = 𝑖
3.32
Table 4.15. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in 106 Workstation (continued)
5 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
6 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
Oct-17
7 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
8 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
Oct-17 (2) & Nov-17
9 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
(4)
10 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
Nov-17 11 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
12 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
Nov-17 (4) & Dec-17
13 5 2 7 1 3 85 5100
(1)
14 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
15 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
Dec-17
16 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
17 4 2 7 1 3 68 4080
18 4 2 7 1 3 68 4080
19 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
Jan-18
20 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
21 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18
22 6 3 7 1 3 144 8640
(3)
23 6 3 7 1 3 144 8640
24 5 3 7 1 3 120 7200
Feb-18
25 6 3 7 1 3 144 8640
26 3 3 7 1 3 72 4320
3.33
WC 107
Below are show the total available capacity (minutes) in 101 workstation. The total available capacity calculated by formula as belows.
For example, the week 1 in Sept 17, the calculation is as belows.
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 =𝑊 × 𝑊 ×𝐻 + 𝑊 ×𝐻 × 𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 = × × + × × 𝑖 = 𝑖
3.34
Table 4.16. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in 107 Workstation (continued)
Nov-17 (4) & Dec-17
13 5 6 7 2 3 240 14400
(1)
14 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
15 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
Dec-17
16 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
17 4 6 7 2 3 192 11520
18 4 6 7 2 3 192 11520
19 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
Jan-18
20 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
21 6 6 7 2 3 288 17280
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18
22 6 7 7 3 3 348 20880
(3)
23 6 7 7 3 3 348 20880
24 5 7 7 3 3 290 17400
Feb-18
25 6 7 7 3 3 348 20880
26 3 7 7 3 3 174 10440
WC 108
Below are show the total available capacity (minutes) in 101 workstation. The total available capacity calculated by formula as belows.
For example, the week 1 in Sept 17, the calculation is as belows.
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 =𝑊 × 𝑊 ×𝐻 + 𝑊 ×𝐻 × 𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 = × × + × × 𝑖 = 𝑖
3.35
Table 4.17. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in 108 Workstation
3.36
Table 4.17. Total Available Capacity (minutes) in 108 Workstation (continued)
18 4 3 7 2 3 108 6480
19 6 3 7 2 3 162 9720
Jan-18
20 6 3 7 2 3 162 9720
21 6 3 7 2 3 162 9720
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18
22 6 3 7 2 3 162 9720
(3)
23 6 3 7 2 3 162 9720
24 5 3 7 2 3 135 8100
Feb-18
25 6 3 7 2 3 162 9720
26 3 3 7 2 3 81 4860
3.37
4.5. Comparing Available Capacity with Required Capacity
In this section, there will be analysis comparing between available capacity and
required capacity based on period; and each workstation.
Below are summary of req capacity and available capacity (minutes) from all
workstations from period week 1 until week 26.
Table 4.18. Req Capacity and Available Capacity Week 1 until Week 26
3.38
Periodic Comparation
120000.00
100000.00
80000.00
60000.00
40000.00
20000.00
0.00
Week 7
Week 16
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 8
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 22
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req Capacity Available Capacity
From the graph above, it is shown that almost in all weeks, the required capacity is
higher than available capacity. It is mean that the utilization is more than 100%.
The utilization could be calculated by formula as belows.
𝑖
𝑖𝑖 𝑖 = × %
𝑖 𝑖
To solve this problem, there are two ways such as decrease the demand so revise
the MPS; or adding overtime hours in order to increase the available capacity. In
this first method, decreasing the required capacity same as available capacity as
belows. Except in week 22, since the capacity is under capacity, so the available
capacity become same as required capacity.
3.39
Below are the periodic comparasion from week 1 until week 26. After revised, the
utilization become 100%, it is mean that the required capacity same as avaialable
capacity.
Req Available
Week Utilization Capacity?
Capacity Capacity
Week 1 89880,00 89880,00 100% Same
Week 2 77040,00 77040,00 100% Same
Week 3 64200,00 64200,00 100% Same
Week 4 77040,00 77040,00 100% Same
Week 5 85680,00 85680,00 100% Same
Week 6 85680,00 85680,00 100% Same
Week 7 85680,00 85680,00 100% Same
Week 8 85680,00 85680,00 100% Same
Week 9 88440,00 88440,00 100% Same
Week 10 89280,00 89280,00 100% Same
Week 11 89280,00 89280,00 100% Same
Week 12 89280,00 89280,00 100% Same
Week 13 73980,00 73980,00 100% Same
Week 14 85680,00 85680,00 100% Same
Week 15 85680,00 85680,00 100% Same
Week 16 85680,00 85680,00 100% Same
Week 17 57120,00 57120,00 100% Same
Week 18 59520,00 59520,00 100% Same
Week 19 89280,00 89280,00 100% Same
Week 20 89280,00 89280,00 100% Same
Week 21 89280,00 89280,00 100% Same
Week 22 102386,44 102386,44 100% Same
Week 23 104040,00 104040,00 100% Same
Week 24 86700,00 86700,00 100% Same
Week 25 104040,00 104040,00 100% Same
Week 26 52020,00 52020,00 100% Same
3.40
Periodic Comparasion After Revised
120000.00
100000.00
80000.00
60000.00
40000.00
20000.00
0.00
Week 9
Week 20
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 21
Week 22
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req Capacity Available Capacity
Because the required capacity changes, so the MPS also should be revised. By
trying inputing number of unit produced in order to calculate same as available
capacity in all periods, the MPS Revised has been calculated as belows.
3.41
Table 4.20. MPS After Revised (continued)
Dec-17 14 360
15 360
16 360
17 240
Jan-18 18 250
19 375
20 375
21 375
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18 (3) 22 430
Feb-18 23 437
24 364
25 437
26 218
Assembly Workstation
In this part, there will be analysis required capacity and available capacity in
assembly workstation from week 1 until week 26. From the graph, it could be seen
that the required capacity is under available capacity.
Assembly
5000.00
4000.00
3000.00
2000.00
1000.00
0.00
Week 1
Week 12
Week 23
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 22
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
3.42
Table 4.21. Assembly
Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
386,40 450,00 450,00 450,00 300,00 315,60 472,80 472,80 472,80 516,00 560,40 466,80 560,40 279,60
3000,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 2400,0 2400,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 3000,0 3600,0 1800,0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
13% 13% 13% 13% 13% 13% 13% 13% 13% 14% 16% 16% 16% 16%
Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under
3.43
Because under capacity, so the available capacity should be reduced by cutting the RT and OT hours. The details of available capacity
as belows. Now, the avaialable capacity remain same as required capacity in assembly workstation.
3.44
Table 4.22. Available Capacity After Revised (continued)
18 4 1 1,31 0 0 5 314
19 6 1 1,31 0 0 8 472
Jan-18
20 6 1 1,31 0 0 8 472
21 6 1 1,31 0 0 8 472
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18 (3) 22 6 1 1,43 0 0 9 515
23 6 1 1,55 0 0 9 558
24 5 1 1,55 0 0 8 465
Feb-18
25 6 1 1,56 0 0 9 562
26 3 1 1,55 0 0 5 279
Assembly
600.00
500.00
400.00
300.00
200.00
100.00
0.00
Week 13
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 22
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req. Capacity Available Cap.
3.45
Inspection Workstation
In this part, there will be analysis required capacity and available capacity in
inpection workstation from week 1 until week 26. From the graph, it could be seen
that the required capacity is under available capacity.
Inspection
4500.00
4000.00
3500.00
3000.00
2500.00
2000.00
1500.00
1000.00
500.00
0.00
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 22
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req. Capacity Available Cap.
3.46
Table 4.23. Inspection
Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
515,20 600,00 600,00 600,00 400,00 420,80 630,40 630,40 630,40 688,00 747,20 622,40 747,20 372,80
3000,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 2400,0 2400,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 3000,0 3600,0 1800,0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
17% 17% 17% 17% 17% 18% 18% 18% 18% 19% 21% 21% 21% 21%
Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under
3.47
Because under capacity, so the available capacity should be reduced by cutting the RT and OT hours. The details of available capacity
as belows. Now, the available capacity remain same as required capacity in inspection workstation.
3.48
Table 4.24. Available Capacity After Revised (continued)
18 4 1 1,75 0 0 7 420
19 6 1 1,75 0 0 11 630
Jan-18
20 6 1 1,75 0 0 11 630
21 6 1 1,75 0 0 11 630
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18
22 6 1 1,91 0 0 11 688
(3)
23 6 1 2,08 0 0 12 749
24 5 1 2,08 0 0 10 624
Feb-18
25 6 1 2,08 0 0 12 749
26 3 1 2,1 0 0 6 378
Inpection Revised
800.00
600.00
400.00
200.00
0.00
3.49
Workstation 101
In this part, there will be analysis required capacity and available capacity in 101
workstation from week 1 until week 26. From the graph, it could be seen that overall
the required capacity is over the available capacity.
Workstation 101
12000.00
10000.00
8000.00
6000.00
4000.00
2000.00
0.00
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 22
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req. Capacity Available Cap.
3.50
Table 4.25. Workstation 101
Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
6268,7 7300,5 7300,5 7300,5 4867,0 5120,0 7670,3 7670,3 7670,3 8371,2 9091,5 7573,0 9091,5 4536,0
0 0 0 0 0 8 9 9 9 4 6 5 6 4
6000,0 6120,0 6120,0 6120,0 4080,0 4800,0 7200,0 7200,0 7200,0 9720,0 8640,0 7200,0 8640,0 4320,0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
104% 119% 119% 119% 119% 107% 107% 107% 107% 86% 105% 105% 105% 105%
Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over
3.51
Because over capacity, so the available capacity should be increased by increasing OT hours. The details of available capacity as
belows. Now, the available capacity remain same as required capacity in workstation 101.
3.52
Table 4.26. Available Capacity After Revised (continued)
18 4 2 7 2 3,70 86 5136
19 6 2 7 2 3,60 127 7632
Jan-18
20 6 2 7 2 3,60 127 7632
21 6 2 7 2 3,60 127 7632
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18 (3) 22 6 3 7 2 1,10 139 8352
23 6 3 7 1 4,20 151 9072
24 5 3 7 1 4,10 126 7530
Feb-18
25 6 3 7 1 4,00 150 9000
26 3 3 7 1 4,80 77 4644
Workstation 101
10000.00
8000.00
6000.00
4000.00
2000.00
0.00
WeekWeek
2 Week
4 Week
6 Week
8 Week
10 Week
12 Week
14 Week
16 Week
18 Week
20 Week
22 Week
24 26
3.53
Workstation 102
In this part, there will be analysis required capacity and available capacity in 102
workstation from week 1 until week 26. From the graph, it could be seen that overall
the required capacity is over the available capacity.
Workstation 102
30000.00
25000.00
20000.00
15000.00
10000.00
5000.00
0.00
Week 8
Week 16
Week 25
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 22
Week 23
Week 24
Week 26
Req. Capacity Available Cap.
3.54
Table 4.27. Workstation 102
Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
17542, 20430, 20430, 20430, 13620, 14328, 21465, 21465, 21465, 23426, 25442, 21192, 25442, 12693,
56 00 00 00 00 24 12 12 12 40 16 72 16 84
14400, 17280, 17280, 17280, 11520, 11520, 17280, 17280, 17280, 20880, 20880, 17400, 20880, 10440,
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
122% 118% 118% 118% 118% 124% 124% 124% 124% 112% 122% 122% 122% 122%
Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over
3.55
Because over capacity, so the available capacity should be increased by increasing OT hours. The details of available capacity as
belows. Now, the available capacity remain same as required capacity in workstation 102.
3.56
Table 4.28. Available Capacity After Revised (continued)
Workstation 102
30000.00
25000.00
20000.00
15000.00
10000.00
5000.00
0.00
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 22
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req. Capacity Available Cap.
3.57
Workstation 103
In this part, there will be analysis required capacity and available capacity in 103
workstation from week 1 until week 26. From the graph, it could be seen that overall
the required capacity is under the available capacity.
Workstation 103
4500.00
4000.00
3500.00
3000.00
2500.00
2000.00
1500.00
1000.00
500.00
0.00
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 22
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req. Capacity Available Cap.
3.58
Table 4.29. Workstation 103
Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
2280,8 2656,2 2656,2 2656,2 1770,8 1862,9 2790,8 2790,8 2790,8 3045,8 3307,9 2755,4 3307,9 1650,4
3 5 5 5 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
3000,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 2400,0 2400,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 3000,0 3600,0 1800,0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
76% 74% 74% 74% 74% 78% 78% 78% 78% 85% 92% 92% 92% 92%
Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under
3.59
Because under capacity, so the available capacity should be reduced by cutting the RT and OT hours. The details of available capacity
as belows. Now, the available capacity remain same as required capacity in workstation 103.
3.60
Table 4.30. Available Capacity After Revised (continued)
17 4 1 7,38 0 0 30 1771
Jan-18 18 4 1 7,76 0 0 31 1863
19 6 1 7,75 0 0 47 2791
20 6 1 7,75 0 0 47 2791
21 6 1 7,75 0 0 47 2791
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18
22 6 1 8,46 0 0 51 3046
(3)
Feb-18 23 6 1 9,19 0 0 55 3308
24 5 1 9,18 0 0 46 2755
25 6 1 9,19 0 0 55 3308
26 3 1 9,17 0 0 28 1650
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 22
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req. Capacity Available Cap.
3.61
Workstation 104
In this part, there will be analysis required capacity and available capacity in 104
workstation from week 1 until week 26. From the graph, it could be seen that overall
the required capacity is over the available capacity.
Workstation 104
30000.00
25000.00
20000.00
15000.00
10000.00
5000.00
0.00
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 22
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req. Capacity Available Cap.
3.62
Table 4.31. Workstation 104
Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
17248, 20087, 20087, 20087, 13391, 14088, 21105, 21105, 21105, 23033, 25015, 20837, 25015, 12481,
47 50 50 50 67 03 27 27 27 67 63 43 63 03
14400, 17280, 17280, 17280, 11520, 11520, 17280, 17280, 17280, 20880, 20880, 17400, 20880, 10440,
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
120% 116% 116% 116% 116% 122% 122% 122% 122% 110% 120% 120% 120% 120%
Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over
3.63
Because over capacity, so the available capacity should be increased by increasing OT hours. The details of available capacity as
belows. Now, the available capacity remain same as required capacity in workstation 104.
3.64
Table 4.32. Available Capacity After Revised (continued)
3.65
Workstation 105
In this part, there will be analysis required capacity and available capacity in 105
workstation from week 1 until week 26. From the graph, it could be seen that some
of required capacity is over or under the available capacity.
Workstation 105
4500.00
4000.00
3500.00
3000.00
2500.00
2000.00
1500.00
1000.00
500.00
0.00
Week 10
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 9
Week 11
Week 12
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 22
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req. Capacity Available Cap.
3.66
Table 4.33. Workstation 105
Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
2898,0 3375,0 3375,0 3375,0 2250,0 2367,0 3546,0 3546,0 3546,0 3870,0 4203,0 3501,0 4203,0 2097,0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3000,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 2400,0 2400,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 3600,0 3000,0 3600,0 1800,0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
97% 94% 94% 94% 94% 99% 99% 99% 99% 108% 117% 117% 117% 117%
Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Under Over Over Over Over Over
3.67
Because some of periods are over capacity, so the available capacity should be increased by increasing OT hours and some of periods
are under capacity, so the available capacity should be decreased by decreasing RT and OT hours. The details of available capacity as
belows. Now, the available capacity remain same as required capacity in workstation 105.
3.68
Table 4.34. Available Capacity After Revised (continued)
16 6 1 7 1 2,38 56 3375
17 4 1 7 1 2,38 38 2250
18 4 1 7 1 2,86 39 2367
19 6 1 7 1 2,85 59 3546
Jan-18
20 6 1 7 1 2,85 59 3546
21 6 1 7 1 2,85 59 3546
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18
22 6 1 7 1 3,75 65 3870
(3)
23 6 1 7 1 4,68 70 4203
24 5 1 7 1 4,67 58 3501
Feb-18
25 6 1 7 1 4,68 70 4203
26 3 1 7 1 4,65 35 2097
3.69
Workstation 106
In this part, there will be analysis required capacity and available capacity in 106
workstation from week 1 until week 26. From the graph, it could be seen that almost
all required capacity is over the available capacity.
Workstation 106
10000.00
9000.00
8000.00
7000.00
6000.00
5000.00
4000.00
3000.00
2000.00
1000.00
0.00
Week 4
Week 13
Week 22
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req. Capacity Available Cap.
3.70
Table 4.35. Workstation 106
Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
6098,6 7102,5 7102,5 7102,5 4735,0 4981,2 7462,3 7462,3 7462,3 8144,2 8844,9 7367,6 8844,9 4413,0
8 0 0 0 0 2 6 6 6 0 8 6 8 2
5100,0 6120,0 6120,0 6120,0 4080,0 4080,0 6120,0 6120,0 6120,0 8640,0 8640,0 7200,0 8640,0 4320,0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
120% 116% 116% 116% 116% 122% 122% 122% 122% 94% 102% 102% 102% 102%
Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Under Over Over Over Over
3.71
Because almost all periods are over capacity, so the available capacity should be increased by increasing OT hours. The details of
available capacity as belows. Now, the available capacity remain same as required capacity in workstation 106.
3.72
Table 4.36. Available Capacity After Revised (continued)
18 4 2 7 1 6,76 83 4981
19 6 2 7 1 6,73 124 7462
Jan-18
20 6 2 7 1 6,73 124 7462
21 6 2 7 1 6,73 124 7462
Jan-18 (3) & Feb-18 (3) 22 6 3 7 1 1,62 136 8144
23 6 3 7 1 3,57 147 8845
24 5 3 7 1 3,56 123 7368
Feb-18
25 6 3 7 1 3,57 147 8845
26 3 3 7 1 3,52 74 4413
3.73
Workstation 107
In this part, there will be analysis required capacity and available capacity in
workstation 107 from week 1 until week 26. From the graph, it could be seen that
almost all required capacity is over the available capacity.
Workstation 107
25000.00
20000.00
15000.00
10000.00
5000.00
0.00
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 22
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req. Capacity Available Cap.
3.74
Table 4.37. Workstation 107
Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
15195, 17696, 17696, 17696, 11797, 12410, 18592, 18592, 18592, 20291, 22037, 18356, 22037, 10995,
18 25 25 25 50 97 86 86 86 70 73 91 73 27
14400, 17280, 17280, 17280, 11520, 11520, 17280, 17280, 17280, 20880, 20880, 17400, 20880, 10440,
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
106% 102% 102% 102% 102% 108% 108% 108% 108% 97% 106% 105% 106% 105%
Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Under Over Over Over Over
3.75
Because all periods are over capacity, so the available capacity should be increased by increasing OT hours. The details of available
capacity as belows. Now, the available capacity remain same as required capacity in workstation 107.
3.76
Table 4.38. Available Capacity After Revised (continued)
Workstation 107
25000.00
20000.00
15000.00
10000.00
5000.00
0.00
3.77
Workstation 108
In this part, there will be analysis required capacity and available capacity in
workstation 108 from week 1 until week 26. From the graph, it could be seen that
all required capacity are over the available capacity.
Workstation 108
14000.00
12000.00
10000.00
8000.00
6000.00
4000.00
2000.00
0.00
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 22
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req. Capacity Available Cap.
3.78
Table 4.39. Workstation 108
Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
8236,7 9592,5 9592,5 9592,5 6395,0 6727,5 10078,5 10078,5 10078,5 10999,4 11945,8 9950,6 11945,8 5960,1
6 0 0 0 0 4 2 2 2 0 6 2 6 4
7680 7200 7200 7200 4800 6480 9720 9720 9720 9720 9720 8100 9720 4860
107% 133% 133% 133% 133% 104% 104% 104% 104% 113% 123% 123% 123% 123%
Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over
3.79
Because all periods are over capacity, so the available capacity should be increased by increasing OT hours. The details of available
capacity as belows. Now, the available capacity remain same as required capacity in workstation 108.
3.80
Table 4.40. Available Capacity After Revised (continued)
10000.00
5000.00
0.00
3.81
In this second method, comparing between available capacity and required capacity
based on each workstation from week 1 until week 26. To make balance between
the available and required capacity, it solved by increasing or decreasing the
overtime hours and do not make changes in MPS. The summary result showed as
belows.
Periodic Comparasion
120000.00
100000.00
80000.00
60000.00
40000.00
20000.00
0.00
Week 3
Week 22
Week 1
Week 2
Week 4
Week 5
Week 6
Week 7
Week 8
Week 9
Week 10
Week 11
Week 12
Week 13
Week 14
Week 15
Week 16
Week 17
Week 18
Week 19
Week 20
Week 21
Week 23
Week 24
Week 25
Week 26
Req Capacity Available Capacity
Below are shown the table of required capacity and available capacity after revised.
Table 4.41. Required Capacity and Available Capacity Revised
3.82
Table 4.41. Required Capacity and Available Capacity Revised (continued)
Week 13 76670,78 76670,78 100% Same
Week 14 89290,50 89290,50 100% Same
Week 15 89290,50 89290,50 100% Same
Week 16 89290,50 89290,50 100% Same
Week 17 59527,00 59527,00 100% Same
Week 18 62622,40 62622,40 100% Same
Week 19 93814,55 93814,55 100% Same
Week 20 93814,55 93814,55 100% Same
Week 21 93814,55 93814,55 100% Same
Week 22 102386,44 102386,44 100% Same
Week 23 111196,44 111196,44 100% Same
Week 24 92624,01 92624,01 100% Same
Week 25 111196,44 111196,44 100% Same
Week 26 55479,16 55479,16 100% Same
From both method, depend to company, would like to maintaining current MPS,
but increasing available capacity; or revise MPS, reducing the required capacity
become same as available capacity.
3.83
CHAPTER V
CONCLUSION
First, the routing data for product X should be defined in order to calculate bill of
resources of product X in each workstation, such as assembly, inspection, 101, 102,
103, 104, 105, 106, 107, and 108. After that, the total required capacity is calculated
in each week/workstation. After that, the available capacity in each
week/workstation also should be calculated. If all of these steps done, continue to
comparing the required capacity with available capacity.
There are two ways to comparing the available capacity and required capacity. First
method, by reducing unit produced (change MPS) and make the required capacity
same as available capacity. Result of MPS revised are shown in Chapter 4. Second
method, maintaining the current MPS and adding/reducing the Regular
Time/Overtime Hour in each workstation, in order to increasing/decreasing
available capacity to fulfill the customer demand. Which one is the best, depend on
the company, would like to reducing the demand with same available capacity right
now; or maintaining the current MPS by increasing/reducing the available capacity.
3.84
REFERENCE
Sipper, D., & Bulfin. JR, R. L. (1997). Production : Planning, Control, and
Integration. New York City: McGraw Hill Education.
3.85
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER I ......................................................................................................... 4.3
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... 4.3
1.1 Background ........................................................................................... 4.3
1.2 Objectives ................................................................................................... 4.4
1.3 Tools and Equipment(s) ............................................................................. 4.4
1.4 Steps ........................................................................................................... 4.4
CHAPTER II ........................................................................................................ 4.5
LITERATURE STUDY ....................................................................................... 4.5
2.1 Definition of Material Requirement Planning............................................ 4.5
2.2 Input of MRP ............................................................................................. 4.7
2.2.1. Master Production Schedule (MPS) ....................................................... 4.7
2.2.2 Bill of Material (BOM) ........................................................................... 4.7
2.2.3 Inventory Status Records ........................................................................ 4.8
2.3 Output of MRP ........................................................................................... 4.8
2.3.1 MRP Primary Report\ ............................................................................. 4.9
2.3.2 MRP Action Report ................................................................................ 4.9
2.3.3 MRP Pegging Report .............................................................................. 4.9
2.4 MRP Process and Calculation .................................................................... 4.9
2.5 Lot Sizing Technique ............................................................................... 4.12
2.5.1 Lot for lot (LFL).................................................................................... 4.12
2.5.2 Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) ......................................................... 4.12
2.5.3 Part Period Balancing (PPB) ................................................................. 4.12
2.5.4 Period Order Quantity (POQ) Approach .............................................. 4.13
2.5.5 Silver Meal Approach ........................................................................... 4.13
2.5.6 Least Total Cost (LTC) Approach ........................................................ 4.13
2.5.7 Grofft’s Allgorithm ............................................................................... 4.14
2.5.8 Freeland and Colley (FC) ...................................................................... 4.14
2.5.9 Wagner-Whitin (WW) .......................................................................... 4.14
CHAPTER III .................................................................................................... 4.15
DATA COLLECTION....................................................................................... 4.15
3.1. Master Production Planning .................................................................... 4.15
4.1
3.2. Product Structure..................................................................................... 4.16
3.3. Inventory Status Records ........................................................................ 4.16
CHAPTER IV .................................................................................................... 4.17
DATA ANALYSIS ............................................................................................ 4.17
4.1. Lot-for-Lot (LFL).................................................................................... 4.17
4.2. Period Order Quantity (POQ) ................................................................. 4.24
4.3. Least Unit Cost (LUC) ............................................................................ 4.31
4.4. Least Total Cost (LTC) ........................................................................... 4.64
4.5. Silver Meal .............................................................................................. 4.98
4.6. Wagner-Whithin (WW) ........................................................................ 4.130
4.7. Groff’s Algorithm ................................................................................. 4.166
4.8. Comparation of Lot Size Technique ..................................................... 4.207
CHAPTER V.................................................................................................... 4.211
CONCLUSION ................................................................................................ 4.211
REFERENCE ................................................................................................... 4.212
4.2
CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background
Materials Requirement Planning (MRP) hardly seems a phrase to create much of a
generate enthusiasm. But in the past few years, some of manufacturing companies
used MRP system for production planning and inventory control on line. However,
manufacturing is only one industry that relies on the appropriate balance between
supply and demand. Whether in a small company or large company, the
implementation of MRP concepts can give the big impact and benefit to the
company. It’s because MRP focuses on two universal concerns of business are
customers and resources. MRP analyzes all company activities in terms of customer
demands and manages all company resources through logic and data processing.
In this report, the Material Requirement Planning (MRP) calculation is used based
on lot-sizing technique. The result will be shown, the purchase and production plan.
4.3
1.2 Objectives
The objectives in this report are:
1.4 Steps
There are several steps to analyze the data, which are:
4.4
CHAPTER II
LITERATURE STUDY
4.5
MRP is more than a projected method of necessity for the individual components
of a product. The MRP system has three main functions: inventory level control,
priority component assignment, and capacity requirement at a more detailed level
than the planning process.
There are 3 inputs needed to build the MRP system. The inputs are:
These three entries create archives interconnected with the production and
purchasing sections so as to produce up-to-date information on ordering, receiving,
and discharging components from the warehouse.
After the third inputs is available. Then, MRP can perform MRP calculation process
according to production requirement. The output of the MRP calculation is the
determination of the number of each required item along with the date of need. This
information is used to plan for the release of orders (disposal of orders) for the
purchase and manufacture of its own components as necessary.
The output produced by the MRP system provides useful and timely information
for production and stock managers. The three most important things in using MRP
that can be summarized from the capabilities and outputs are inventory planning
and control, 8 detailed capacities planning, and priority planning on the workshop.
Thus, the MRP assists operations managers in making decisions regarding the
rescheduling of orders and the postponement or scoring of orders on MPS if
priorities change.
4.6
2.2 Input of MRP
There are 3 inputs needed to build the MRP system. The inputs are:
Bill of Material will completely break down the products in various subassembly,
components and product raw materials. These solutions are also shown in the
product structure. The production structure contains information about the
relationship between the components in an assembly. This information is very
important in determining the gross and net requirements, furthermore the
production structure contains information about all items such as item number,
amount required at each assembly stage.
4.7
Figure 2.1 Structure Product P
4.8
2.3.1 MRP Primary Report\
MRP's main reports are often referred to briefly as MRP reports, typically using
either a horizontal format with time in buckets (usually in weekly periods), or
buckles format vertical format. Each form of this report has advantages and
disadvantages.
However, MRP cannot change the quantity of planned orders and schedule firm
receipts, but MRP can only suggest those changes. An item that does not require
attention will not be displayed in the MRP Action Report. But before taking an
action the planner should review the other MRP reports, the Primary Pegging
Report.
4.9
Figure 2.2 Layout of MRP Table
Lead Time
Lead time is the time required since the MRP suggests an order until the item
is ready for use.
On Hand
On hand is an initial inventory that shows the quantity of items physically
present in the warehouse.
Gross Requirement
Gross requirement is the gross demand of an item derived from production
planning.
Schedule Receipts
Schedule Receipt is the Schedule of arrival of goods ordered in period t
Projected On Hand
Project on hand is a record of the amount of goods available in the initial period
obtained from inventory records.
Net Requirement
Net requirement is the required net requirement in period t.
Net requirement = max {0; Dt-It-Qt} (2-1)
If the item has a safety stock, the calculation of the net requirement is as
follows:
Net requirement = max {0; Dt+SS-It-Qt} (2-2)
Dt = Gross Requirement at period t
4.10
It = Available Inventory (inventory on hand) at the beginning of period t or
available inventory at the end period t-1
Qt = Schedule Receipt at period t
Lot Size
Lot size is the order quantity of the item. There are many techniques that can
be used to determine the size of Lot that can be used, such as EOQ techniques.
Lot sizing is to ensure that all requirements will be satisfied, an order will be
scheduled for completion at the beginning of the first period in which there is
a positive net requirement. The size of the order may be just equal to the net
requirement in the period in which it is due, or it may be larger to take
advantage of economies of scale also covering net requirements in some
subsequent periods.
Lot sizing techniques:
- Lot-for-lot (LFL) Technique,
- Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) Approach,
- Period Order Quantity (POQ) Approach,
- Least Unit Cost (LUC) Approach,
- Least Total Cost (LTC) Approach,
- Silver Meal Approach,
- Part Period Balancing (PPB)
- Mc Laren’s Order Moment (MOM)
- Groff’s Algorithm
- Freeland and Colley (FC)
- Wagner-Whitin (WW)
Planned Order Receipts
A planned order receipt is the quantity of orders planned for the period.
Planned Order Release
Planned order release is the quantity of an order plan placed or issued within a
certain period for which the ordered item will be available when needed.
4.11
2.5 Lot Sizing Technique
Heizer and Render (2005), state that the MRP system is an excellent way to
determine production schedules and clean needs.
However, when there is a net need, then the decision of how much to order should
be made. This decision is called a lot-sizing decision. Some of the techniques that
can be used are as follows:
.𝑂.
EOQ = √ (2-3)
ℎ
4.12
size to describe future lot size requirements. The partial balance of periods makes
up a part of the economic period (EPP), which is the cost of setup with the cost of
storage. EPP can be calculated by the following formula:
𝑆 𝑈 𝑂
EPP = (2-4)
𝐻
𝑂𝑄
P∗= (2-5)
4.13
periods’ demand until the total cumulative holding cost exceeds the setup cost (but
not including).
Holding cost for period t = Dt. Periods carried. Holding cost (2-7)
n n− Dn < O or S /h (2-8)
4.14
CHAPTER III
DATA COLLECTION
After analyze the capacity planning, next step for production planning is Material
Requirements Planning (MRP). It is a technique used to plan production of
subassemblies, components, and raw materials to support MPS. The output of this
MRP is purchase and production plan. There are several inputs for MRP, such as
belows.
Oct-17
(2) &
Month Sep-17 Oct-17 Nov-17
Nov-
17 (4)
WEEK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Unit
Produced / 377 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375 375
Week
Nov- Jan-
17 18
(4) (3)
& Dec-17 Jan-18 & Feb-18
Dec- Feb-
17 18
(1) (3)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
4.15
3.2. Product Structure
Below are shown the product structure of product X. It will be used for calculating
the MRP.
Part/Item Quantity
X 1
B 2
C 1
D 6
E 28
F 2
From the product structure and BOM, it is showed that in producing one product X,
it need 2 items B, 1 item C, 6 items D, 28 items E, and 2 items F.
4.16
CHAPTER IV
DATA ANALYSIS
In this analysis, there are several calculations of lot sizing technique and the total
cost will be calculated. A lot sizing technique with lowest cost will be choosen and
make planning of the materials/parts for next six months.
To calculate the total cost for producing product X by using this lot size technique,
so calculate the total holding and ordering cost in each items, such as product X,
item B, C, D, E, and F. The summary of calculations are shown as belows. The total
cost by using Lot-for-Lot is Rp 472.800.000.
PART COST
X Rp 79.800.000
B Rp 78.000.000
C Rp 78.000.000
D Rp 78.000.000
E Rp 81.000.000
F Rp 78.000.000
TOTAL COST ALL PART Rp 472.800.000
For detail calculation of each part and POR, are showed on the next page.
4.17
Product X
Table 4.2. LFL Product X
Period (Week) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 377 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Schedule Receipt
Beginning Inventory 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Lot Sizing 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
Table 4.3. Total Cost
Ordering Cost 26 Rp 78.000.000
Holding Cost 100 Rp 1.800.000
Total Cost Rp 79.800.000
4.18
Item B
Table 4.4. LFL Product B
Period (Week) -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Lot Sizing 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
4.19
Item C
Table 4.6. LFL Product C
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Lot Sizing 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375 375
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0 0
Table 4.7. Total Cost
Ordering Cost 26 Rp 78.000.000
Holding Cost 0 Rp -
Total Cost Rp 78.000.000
4.20
Item D
Table 4.8. LFL Product D
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Lot Sizing 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250 1866
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0 0
Table 4.9. Total Cost
Ordering Cost 26 Rp 78.000.000
Holding Cost 0 Rp -
Total Cost Rp 78.000.000
4.21
Item E
Table 4.10. LFL Product E
Period (Week) -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Lot Sizing 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964 9884
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0 0
Table 4.11. Total Cost
Ordering Cost 27 Rp 81.000.000
Holding Cost 0 Rp -
Total Cost Rp 81.000.000
4.22
Item F
Table 4.12. LFL Product F
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Lot Sizing 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750 622
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0 0
Table 4.13. Total Cost
Ordering Cost 26 Rp 78.000.000
Holding Cost 0 Rp -
Total Cost Rp 78.000.000
4.23
4.2. Period Order Quantity (POQ)
The POQ conducted in each items. All of items are assumed, has same lead time
equal with 1 week, no safety stock, ordering cost per week is Rp 3.000.000 and
holding cost is Rp 18.000/unit/week.
To calculate the total cost for producing product X by using this lot size technique,
so calculate the total holding and ordering cost in each items, such as product X,
item B, C, D, E, and F. The summary of calculations are shown as belows. The total
cost by using POQ is Rp 472.800.000.
PART COST
X Rp 79.800.000
B Rp 78.000.000
C Rp 78.000.000
D Rp 78.000.000
E Rp 81.000.000
F Rp 78.000.000
TOTAL COST ALL PART Rp 472.800.000
To calculate lot size by using POQ method, the value od POQ should be calculated.
First, the value of EOQ and Annual Req should be calculated as belows.
. .∑ . .
=√ =√ = .
# .𝐻 .
∑
= × # 𝑌 = × =
And then, the value of POQ are calculated by using formula as belows.
.
= 𝑌 = × = . ~
From result of POQ, it is mean that the lot size cover one period in each period. For
detail calculation of each part and POR, are showed on the next page.
4.24
Product X
Table 4.15. POQ Product X
Period (Week) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 377 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Schedule Receipt
Beginning Inventory 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Lot Sizing 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
Table 4.16. Total Cost
Ordering Cost 26 Rp 78.000.000
Holding Cost 100 Rp 1.800.000
Total Cost Rp 79.800.000
4.25
Item B
Table 4.17. POQ Product B
Period (Week) -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Lot Sizing 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
4.26
Item C
Table 4.19. POQ Product C
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Lot Sizing 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375 375
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0 0
Table 4.20. Total Cost
Ordering Cost 26 Rp 78.000.000
Holding Cost 0 Rp -
Total Cost Rp 78.000.000
4.27
Item D
Table 4.21. POQ Product D
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Lot Sizing 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250 1866
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0 0
Table 4.22. Total Cost
Ordering Cost 26 Rp 78.000.000
Holding Cost 0 Rp -
Total Cost Rp 78.000.000
4.28
Item E
Table 4.23. POQ Product E
Period (Week) -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Lot Sizing 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964 9884
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0 0
Table 4.24. Total Cost
Ordering Cost 27 Rp 81.000.000
Holding Cost 0 Rp -
Total Cost Rp 81.000.000
4.29
Item F
Table 4.25. POQ Product F
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Lot Sizing 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750 622
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0 0
Table 4.26. Total Cost
Ordering Cost 26 Rp 78.000.000
Holding Cost 0 Rp -
Total Cost Rp 78.000.000
4.30
4.3. Least Unit Cost (LUC)
LUC is a dynamic lot sizing technique that includes ordering cost and inventory
carrying cost for each trial lot size divides by the number of units in lot size, then
picking the lot size with lowest unit cost. The LUC lot sizing was conducted in each
items. All of items are assumed, has same lead time equal with 1 week, no safety
stock, ordering cost per week is Rp 3.000.000 and holding cost is Rp
18.000/unit/week.
To calculate the total cost for producing product X by using this lot size technique,
so calculate the total holding and ordering cost in each items, such as product X,
item B, C, D, E, and F. The summary of calculations are shown as belows. The total
cost by using LUC is Rp 472.800.000.
PART COST
X Rp 79.800.000
B Rp 78.000.000
C Rp 78.000.000
D Rp 78.000.000
E Rp 81.000.000
F Rp 78.000.000
TOTAL COST ALL PART Rp 472.800.000
For detail calculation of each part and POR, are showed on the next page.
Product X
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of cummulative cost is calculated by formula as belows.
= + ×𝐻 ×𝐻
4.31
For example, 1st period, so the calculation of cummulative cost and cost per unit as
belows.
= + × × =
= =
If the value of cost/unit increased, so cut the period and starting new calculation
from that period to next period.
Perio Net Trial Trial Lot Size Cummulative Cost per unit
d Requiremen periods Cost
ts Combined (Cum. Net (IDR) (IDR)
Req)
1 307 1 307 Rp Rp
3.000.000 9.772
2 323 1,2 630 Rp Rp
8.814.000 13.990
3 270 1,2,3 900 Rp Rp
18.534.000 20.593
Combine only
period 1
2 323 2 323 Rp Rp
3.000.000 9.288
3 270 2,3 593 Rp Rp
7.860.000 13.255
4 323 2,3,4 916 Rp Rp
19.488.000 21.275
Only period 2
3 270 3 270 Rp Rp
3.000.000 11.111
4 323 3,4 593 Rp Rp
8.814.000 14.863
5 360 3,4,5 953 Rp Rp
21.774.000 22.848
Only period 3
4 323 4 323Rp Rp
3.000.000 9.288
5 360 4,5 683 Rp Rp
9.480.000 13.880
6 360 4,5,6 1043 Rp Rp
22.440.000 21.515
4.32
Table 4.28. LUC Method (continued)
4.33
Table 4.28. LUC Method (continued)
4.34
Table 4.28. LUC Method (continued)
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.35
Table 4.29. LUC Product X
Period (Week) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 377 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Schedule Receipt
Beginning Inventory 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Lot Sizing 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
4.36
Item B
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of cummulative cost is calculated by formula as belows.
= + ×𝐻
×𝐻
For example, 1st period, so the calculation of cummulative cost and cost per unit as
belows.
= + × × =
= =
If the value of cost/unit increased, so cut the period and starting new calculation
from that period to next period.
4.37
Table 4.31. LUC Method (continued)
4.38
Table 4.31. LUC Method (continued)
4.39
Table 4.31. LUC Method (continued)
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.40
Table 4.32. LUC Product B
Period (Week) -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Lot Sizing 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
4.41
Item C
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of cummulative cost is calculated by formula as belows.
= + ×𝐻
×𝐻
For example, 1st period, so the calculation of cummulative cost and cost per unit as
belows.
= + × × =
= =
If the value of cost/unit increased, so cut the period and starting new calculation
from that period to next period.
4.42
Table 4.34. LUC Method (continued)
4.43
Table 4.34. LUC Method (continued)
4.44
Table 4.34. LUC Method (continued)
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.45
Table 4.35. LUC Product C
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Lot Sizing 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375 375
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0 0
4.46
Item D
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of cummulative cost is calculated by formula as belows.
= + ×𝐻
×𝐻
For example, 1st period, so the calculation of cummulative cost and cost per unit as
belows.
= + × × =
= =
If the value of cost/unit increased, so cut the period and starting new calculation
from that period to next period.
Perio Net Trial Trial Lot Size Cummulative Cost per unit
d Requiremen periods Cost
ts Combined (Cum. Net (IDR) (IDR)
Req)
-1 1842 -1 1842 Rp Rp
3.000.000 1.629
0 1938 -1,0 3780 Rp Rp
37.884.000 10.022
1 1620 -1,0,1 5400 Rp Rp
96.204.000 17.816
0 1938 0 1938 Rp Rp
3.000.000 1.548
1 1620 0,1 3558 Rp Rp
32.160.000 9.039
2 1938 0,1,2 5496 Rp Rp
101.928.000 18.546
4.47
Table 4.37. LUC Method (continued)
4.48
Table 4.37. LUC Method (continued)
4.49
Table 4.37. LUC Method (continued)
4.50
Table 4.37. LUC Method (continued)
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.51
Table 4.38. LUC Product D
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Lot Sizing 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250 1866
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0 0
4.52
Item E
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of cummulative cost is calculated by formula as belows.
= + ×𝐻
×𝐻
For example, 1st period, so the calculation of cummulative cost and cost per unit as
belows.
= + × × =
= =
If the value of cost/unit increased, so cut the period and starting new calculation
from that period to next period.
Perio Net Trial Trial Lot Size Cummulative Cost per unit
d Requiremen periods Cost
ts Combined (Cum. Net (IDR) (IDR)
Req)
-2 7368 -2 7368 Rp Rp
3.000.000 407
-1 8980 -2,-1 16348 Rp Rp
164.640.000 10.071
0 7772 -2,-1,0 24120 Rp Rp
444.432.000 18.426
-1 8980 -1 8980 Rp Rp
3.000.000 334
0 7772 -1,0 16752 Rp Rp
142.896.000 8.530
1 8832 -1,0,1 25584 Rp Rp
460.848.000 18.013
4.53
Table 4.40. LUC Method (continued)
0 7772 0 7772 Rp Rp
3.000.000 386
1 8832 0,1 1660 Rp Rp 9.755
4 161.976.000
2 9932 0,1, 2653 Rp Rp
2 6 519.528.000 19.578
Combine only period
0
1 8832 1 8832 Rp Rp
3.000.000 340
2 9932 1,2 1876 Rp Rp 9.687
4 181.776.000
3 1008 1,2, 2884 Rp Rp
0 3 4 544.656.000 18.883
Combine only period 1
2 9932 2 9932 Rp Rp
3.000.000 302
3 1008 2,3 2001 Rp Rp 9.216
0 2 184.440.000
4 1008 2,3, 3009 Rp Rp
0 4 2 547.320.000 18.188
Only period 2
3 1008 3 1008 Rp Rp
0 0 3.000.000 298
4 1008 3,4 2016 Rp Rp 9.149
0 0 184.440.000
5 1008 3,4, 3024 Rp Rp
0 5 0 547.320.000 18.099
Only period 3
4 1008 4 1008 Rp Rp
0 0 3.000.000 298
5 1008 4,5 2016 Rp Rp 9.149
0 0 184.440.000
6 1034 4,5, 3050 Rp Rp
4 6 4 556.824.000 18.254
Only period 4
5 1008 5 1008 Rp Rp
0 0 3.000.000 298
6 1034 5,6 2042 Rp Rp 9.263
4 4 189.192.000
7 1048 5,6, 3090 Rp Rp
4 7 8 566.616.000 18.332
Only Period 5
4.54
Table 4.40. LUC Method (continued)
4.55
Table 4.40. LUC Method (continued)
4.56
Table 4.40. LUC Method (continued)
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.57
Table 4.41. LUC Product E
Period (Week) -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Lot Sizing 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964 9884
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0 0
4.58
Item F
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of cummulative cost is calculated by formula as belows.
= + ×𝐻
×𝐻
For example, 1st period, so the calculation of cummulative cost and cost per unit as
belows.
= + × × =
= =
If the value of cost/unit increased, so cut the period and starting new calculation
from that period to next period.
Perio Net Trial Trial Lot Size Cummulative Cost per unit
d Requiremen periods Cost
ts Combined (Cum. Net (IDR) (IDR)
Req)
-1 614 -1 614 Rp Rp
3.000.000 4.886
0 646 -1,0 1260 Rp Rp
14.628.000 11.610
1 540 -1,0,1 1800 Rp Rp
34.068.000 18.927
0 646 0 646
Rp Rp
3.000.000 4.644
1 540 0,1 1186 Rp Rp
12.720.000 10.725
2 646 0,1,2 1832 Rp Rp
35.976.000 19.638
4.59
Table 4.43. LUC Method (continued)
4.60
Table 4.43. LUC Method (continued)
4.61
Table 4.43. LUC Method (continued)
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.62
Table 4.44. LUC Product F
Period (Week) -2
-1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Lot Sizing 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750 622
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0 0
4.63
4.4. Least Total Cost (LTC)
LTC approach tries to balance the holding and set up (ordering) cost. The lot-for-
lot conducted in each items, such as belows. All of items are assumed, has same
lead time equal with 1 week, no safety stock, ordering cost per week is Rp 3.000.000
and holding cost is Rp 18.000/unit/month.
To calculate the total cost for producing product X by using this lot size technique,
so calculate the total holding and ordering cost in each items, such as product X,
item B, C, D, E, and F. The summary of calculations are shown as belows. The total
cost by using LTC is Rp 481.800.000.
PART COST
X Rp 79.800.000
B Rp 81.000.000
C Rp 81.000.000
D Rp 78.000.000
E Rp 84.000.000
F Rp 78.000.000
TOTAL COST ALL Rp 481.800.000
PART
For detail calculation of each part and POR, are showed on the next page.
Product X
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of holding cost is calculated by formula as belows.
𝐻 = ×𝐻 ×𝐻
𝐻 = × × =
If the value of cummulative holding cost increased, so cut the period and starting
new calculation from that period to next period.
4.64
Table 4.47. LUC Method
4.65
Table 4.47. LUC Method (continued)
6 360 6 360 0 Rp - Rp -
7 360 6,7 720 1 Rp 6.480.000 Rp 6.480.000
8 360 6,7,8 1080 2 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 19.440.000
Only Period 6
7 360 7 360 0 Rp - Rp -
8 360 7,8 720 1 Rp 6.480.000 Rp 6.480.000
9 371 7,8,9 1091 2 Rp 13.356.000 Rp 19.836.000
Only Period 7
8 360 8 360 0 Rp - Rp -
9 371 8,9 731 1 Rp 6.678.000 Rp 6.678.000
10 375 8,9,10 1106 2 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 20.178.000
Only Period 8
9 371 9 371 0 Rp - Rp -
10 375 9,1 746 1 Rp 6.750.000 Rp 6.750.000
11 375 9,10,11 1121 2 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 20.250.000
Only Period 9
10 375 10 375 0 Rp - Rp -
11 375 10,11 750 1 Rp 6.750.000 Rp 6.750.000
12 375 10,11,12 1125 2 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 20.250.000
Only Period 10
11 375 11 375 0 Rp - Rp -
12 375 11,12 750 1 Rp 6.750.000 Rp 6.750.000
13 311 11,12,13 1061 2 Rp 11.196.000 Rp 17.946.000
Only Period 11
12 375 12 375 0 Rp - Rp -
13 311 12,13 686 1 Rp 5.598.000 Rp 5.598.000
14 360 12,13,14 1046 2 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 18.558.000
Only Period 12
13 311 13 311 0 Rp - Rp -
14 360 13,14 671 1 Rp 6.480.000 Rp 6.480.000
15 360 13,14,15 1031 2 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 19.440.000
4.66
Table 4.47. LUC Method (continued)
14 360 14 360 0 Rp - Rp -
15 360 14,15 720 1 Rp 6.480.000 Rp 6.480.000
16 360 14,15,16 1080 2 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 19.440.000
15 360 15 360 0 Rp - Rp -
16 360 15,16 720 1 Rp 6.480.000 Rp 6.480.000
17 240 15,16,17 960 2 Rp 8.640.000 Rp 15.120.000
16 360 16 360 0 Rp - Rp -
17 240 16,17 600 1 Rp 4.320.000 Rp 4.320.000
18 250 16,17,18 850 2 Rp 9.000.000 Rp 13.320.000
17 240 17 240 0 Rp - Rp -
18 250 17,18 490 1 Rp 4.500.000 Rp 4.500.000
19 375 17,18,19 865 2 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 18.000.000
18 250 18 250 0 Rp - Rp -
19 375 18,19 625 1 Rp 6.750.000 Rp 6.750.000
20 375 18,19,20 1000 2 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 20.250.000
19 375 19 375 0 Rp - Rp -
20 375 19,20 750 1 Rp 6.750.000 Rp 6.750.000
21 375 19,20,21 1125 2 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 20.250.000
20 375 20 375 0 Rp - Rp -
21 375 20,21 750 1 Rp 6.750.000 Rp 6.750.000
22 430 20,21,22 1180 2 Rp 15.480.000 Rp 22.230.000
21 375 21 375 0 Rp - Rp -
22 430 21,22 805 1 Rp 7.740.000 Rp 7.740.000
23 437 21,22,23 1242 2 Rp 15.732.000 Rp 23.472.000
22 430 22 430 0 Rp - Rp -
23 437 22,23 867 1 Rp 7.866.000 Rp 7.866.000
24 364 22,23,24 1231 2 Rp 13.104.000 Rp 20.970.000
23 437 23 437 0 Rp - Rp -
24 364 23,24 801 1 Rp 6.552.000 Rp 6.552.000
25 437 23,24,25 1238 2 Rp 15.732.000 Rp 22.284.000
4.67
Table 4.47. LUC Method (continued)
24 364 24 364 0 Rp - Rp -
25 437 24,25 801 1 Rp 7.866.000 Rp 7.866.000
26 218 24,25,26 1019 2 Rp 7.848.000 Rp 15.714.000
25 437 25 437 0 Rp - Rp -
26 218 25,26 655 1 Rp 3.924.000 Rp 3.924.000
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.68
Table 4.48. LUC Product X
Period (Week) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 377 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Schedule Receipt
Beginning Inventory 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Lot Sizing 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
4.69
Item B
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of holding cost is calculated by formula as belows.
𝐻 = ×𝐻 ×𝐻
𝐻 = × × =
If the value of cummulative holding cost increased, so cut the period and starting
new calculation from that period to next period.
4.70
Table 4.50. LUC Method (continued)
3 646 3 646 0 Rp - Rp -
4 720 3,4 1366 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
5 720 3,4,5 2086 2 Rp 25.920.000 Rp 38.880.000
Only period 3
4 720 4 720 0 Rp - Rp -
5 720 4,5 1440 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
6 720 4,5,6 2160 2 Rp 25.920.000 Rp 38.880.000
Only period 4
5 720 5 720 0 Rp - Rp -
6 720 5,6 1440 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
7 720 5,6,7 2160 2 Rp 25.920.000 Rp 38.880.000
Only Period 5
6 720 6 720 0 Rp - Rp -
7 720 6,7 1440 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
8 742 6,7,8 2182 2 Rp 26.712.000 Rp 39.672.000
Only Period 6
7 720 7 720 0 Rp - Rp -
8 742 7,8 1462 1 Rp 13.356.000 Rp 13.356.000
9 750 7,8,9 2212 2 Rp 27.000.000 Rp 40.356.000
Only Period 7
8 742 8 742 0 Rp - Rp -
9 750 8,9 1492 1 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 13.500.000
10 750 8,9,10 2242 2 Rp 27.000.000 Rp 40.500.000
Only Period 8
9 750 9 750 0 Rp - Rp -
10 750 9,1 1500 1 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 13.500.000
11 750 9,10,11 2250 2 Rp 27.000.000 Rp 40.500.000
Only Period 9
10 750 10 750 0 Rp - Rp -
11 750 10,11 1500 1 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 13.500.000
12 622 10,11,12 2122 2 Rp 22.392.000 Rp 35.892.000
Only Period 10
11 750 11 750 0 Rp - Rp -
12 622 11,12 1372 1 Rp 11.196.000 Rp 11.196.000
13 720 11,12,13 2092 2 Rp 25.920.000 Rp 37.116.000
Only Period 11
12 622 12 622 0 Rp - Rp -
13 720 12,13 1342 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
14 720 12,13,14 2062 2 Rp 25.920.000 Rp 38.880.000
4.71
Table 4.50. LUC Method (continued)
13 720 13 720 0 Rp - Rp -
14 720 13,14 1440 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
15 720 13,14,15 2160 2 Rp 25.920.000 Rp 38.880.000
14 720 14 720 0 Rp - Rp -
15 720 14,15 1440 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
16 480 14,15,16 1920 2 Rp 17.280.000 Rp 30.240.000
15 720 15 720 0 Rp - Rp -
16 480 15,16 1200 1 Rp 8.640.000 Rp 8.640.000
17 500 15,16,17 1700 2 Rp 18.000.000 Rp 26.640.000
16 480 16 480 0 Rp - Rp -
17 500 16,17 980 1 Rp 9.000.000 Rp 9.000.000
18 750 16,17,18 1730 2 Rp 27.000.000 Rp 36.000.000
17 500 17 500 0 Rp - Rp -
18 750 17,18 1250 1 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 13.500.000
19 750 17,18,19 2000 2 Rp 27.000.000 Rp 40.500.000
18 750 18 750 0 Rp - Rp -
19 750 18,19 1500 1 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 13.500.000
20 750 18,19,20 2250 2 Rp 27.000.000 Rp 40.500.000
19 750 19 750 0 Rp - Rp -
20 750 19,20 1500 1 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 13.500.000
21 860 19,20,21 2360 2 Rp 30.960.000 Rp 44.460.000
20 750 20 750 0 Rp - Rp -
21 860 20,21 1610 1 Rp 15.480.000 Rp 15.480.000
22 874 20,21,22 2484 2 Rp 31.464.000 Rp 46.944.000
21 860 21 860 0 Rp - Rp -
22 874 21,22 1734 1 Rp 15.732.000 Rp 15.732.000
23 728 21,22,23 2462 2 Rp 26.208.000 Rp 41.940.000
22 874 22 874 0 Rp - Rp -
23 728 22,23 1602 1 Rp 13.104.000 Rp 13.104.000
24 874 22,23,24 2476 2 Rp 31.464.000 Rp 44.568.000
4.72
Table 4.50. LUC Method (continued)
23 728 23 728 0 Rp - Rp -
24 874 23,24 1602 1 Rp 15.732.000 Rp 15.732.000
25 436 23,24,25 2038 2 Rp 15.696.000 Rp 31.428.000
24 874 24 874 0 Rp - Rp -
25 436 24,25 1310 1 Rp 7.848.000 Rp 7.848.000
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.73
Table 4.51. LUC Product B
Period (Week) -1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Lot Sizing 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 26
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0 0
4.74
Item C
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of holding cost is calculated by formula as belows.
𝐻 = ×𝐻 ×𝐻
𝐻 = × × =
If the value of cummulative holding cost increased, so cut the period and starting
new calculation from that period to next period.
4.75
Table 4.53. LUC Method (continued)
3 323 3 323 0 Rp - Rp -
4 360 3,4 683 1 Rp 6.480.000 Rp 6.480.000
5 360 3,4,5 1043 2 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 19.440.000
Only period 3
4 360 4 360 0 Rp - Rp -
5 360 4,5 720 1 Rp 6.480.000 Rp 6.480.000
6 360 4,5,6 1080 2 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 19.440.000
Only period 4
5 360 5 360 0 Rp - Rp -
6 360 5,6 720 1 Rp 6.480.000 Rp 6.480.000
7 360 5,6,7 1080 2 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 19.440.000
Only Period 5
6 360 6 360 0 Rp - Rp -
7 360 6,7 720 1 Rp 6.480.000 Rp 6.480.000
8 371 6,7,8 1091 2 Rp 13.356.000 Rp 19.836.000
Only Period 6
7 360 7 360 0 Rp - Rp -
8 371 7,8 731 1 Rp 6.678.000 Rp 6.678.000
9 375 7,8,9 1106 2 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 20.178.000
Only Period 7
8 371 8 371 0 Rp - Rp -
9 375 8,9 746 1 Rp 6.750.000 Rp 6.750.000
10 375 8,9,10 1121 2 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 20.250.000
Only Period 8
9 375 9 375 0 Rp - Rp -
10 375 9,1 750 1 Rp 6.750.000 Rp 6.750.000
11 375 9,10,11 1125 2 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 20.250.000
Only Period 9
10 375 10 375 0 Rp - Rp -
11 375 10,11 750 1 Rp 6.750.000 Rp 6.750.000
12 311 10,11,12 1061 2 Rp 11.196.000 Rp 17.946.000
Only Period 10
11 375 11 375 0 Rp - Rp -
12 311 11,12 686 1 Rp 5.598.000 Rp 5.598.000
13 360 11,12,13 1046 2 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 18.558.000
Only Period 11
12 311 12 311 0 Rp - Rp -
13 360 12,13 671 1 Rp 6.480.000 Rp 6.480.000
14 360 12,13,14 1031 2 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 19.440.000
4.76
Table 4.53. LUC Method (continued)
13 360 13 360 0 Rp - Rp -
14 360 13,14 720 1 Rp 6.480.000 Rp 6.480.000
15 360 13,14,15 1080 2 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 19.440.000
14 360 14 360 0 Rp - Rp -
15 360 14,15 720 1 Rp 6.480.000 Rp 6.480.000
16 240 14,15,16 960 2 Rp 8.640.000 Rp 15.120.000
15 360 15 360 0 Rp - Rp -
16 240 15,16 600 1 Rp 4.320.000 Rp 4.320.000
17 250 15,16,17 850 2 Rp 9.000.000 Rp 13.320.000
16 240 16 240 0 Rp - Rp -
17 250 16,17 490 1 Rp 4.500.000 Rp 4.500.000
18 375 16,17,18 865 2 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 18.000.000
17 250 17 250 0 Rp - Rp -
18 375 17,18 625 1 Rp 6.750.000 Rp 6.750.000
19 375 17,18,19 1000 2 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 20.250.000
18 375 18 375 0 Rp - Rp -
19 375 18,19 750 1 Rp 6.750.000 Rp 6.750.000
20 375 18,19,20 1125 2 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 20.250.000
19 375 19 375 0 Rp - Rp -
20 375 19,20 750 1 Rp 6.750.000 Rp 6.750.000
21 430 19,20,21 1180 2 Rp 15.480.000 Rp 22.230.000
20 375 20 375 0 Rp - Rp -
21 430 20,21 805 1 Rp 7.740.000 Rp 7.740.000
22 437 20,21,22 1242 2 Rp 15.732.000 Rp 23.472.000
21 430 21 430 0 Rp - Rp -
22 437 21,22 867 1 Rp 7.866.000 Rp 7.866.000
23 364 21,22,23 1231 2 Rp 13.104.000 Rp 20.970.000
22 437 22 437 0 Rp - Rp -
23 364 22,23 801 1 Rp 6.552.000 Rp 6.552.000
24 437 22,23,24 1238 2 Rp 15.732.000 Rp 22.284.000
4.77
Table 4.53. LUC Method (continued)
23 364 23 364 0 Rp - Rp -
24 437 23,24 801 1 Rp 7.866.000 Rp 7.866.000
25 218 23,24,25 1019 2 Rp 7.848.000 Rp 15.714.000
24 437 24 437 0 Rp - Rp -
25 218 24,25 655 1 Rp 3.924.000 Rp 3.924.000
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.78
Table 4.54. LUC Product C
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Lot Sizing 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375 375
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 26
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0 0
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0 0 0
4.79
Item D
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of holding cost is calculated by formula as belows.
𝐻 = ×𝐻 ×𝐻
𝐻 = × × =
If the value of cummulative holding cost increased, so cut the period and starting
new calculation from that period to next period.
0 1938 0 1938 0 Rp Rp
- -
1 1620 0,1 3558 1 Rp Rp
29.160.000 29.160.000
2 1938 0,1,2 5496 2 Rp Rp
69.768.000 98.928.000
Combine
only period 0
1 1620 1 1620 0 Rp Rp
- -
2 1938 1,2 3558 1 Rp Rp
34.884.000 34.884.000
3 2160 1,2,3 5718 2 Rp Rp
77.760.000 112.644.00
0
4.80
Table 4.56. LUC Method (continued)
2 1938 2 1938 0 Rp - Rp -
3 2160 2,3 4098 1 Rp 38.880.000 Rp 38.880.000
4 2160 2,3,4 6258 2 Rp 77.760.000 Rp 116.640.000
Only period 2
3 2160 3 2160 0 Rp - Rp -
4 2160 3,4 4320 1 Rp 38.880.000 Rp 38.880.000
5 2160 3,4,5 6480 2 Rp 77.760.000 Rp 116.640.000
Only period 3
4 2160 4 2160 0 Rp - Rp -
5 2160 4,5 4320 1 Rp 38.880.000 Rp 38.880.000
6 2160 4,5,6 6480 2 Rp 77.760.000 Rp 116.640.000
Only period 4
5 2160 5 2160 0 Rp - Rp -
6 2160 5,6 4320 1 Rp 38.880.000 Rp 38.880.000
7 2226 5,6,7 6546 2 Rp 80.136.000 Rp 119.016.000
Only Period 5
6 2160 6 2160 0 Rp - Rp -
7 2226 6,7 4386 1 Rp 40.068.000 Rp 40.068.000
8 2250 6,7,8 6636 2 Rp 81.000.000 Rp 121.068.000
Only Period 6
7 2226 7 2226 0 Rp - Rp -
8 2250 7,8 4476 1 Rp 40.500.000 Rp 40.500.000
9 2250 7,8,9 6726 2 Rp 81.000.000 Rp 121.500.000
Only Period 7
4.81
Table 4.56. LUC Method (continued)
8 225 8 225 0 Rp Rp
0 0 - -
9 225 8,9 450 1 Rp 40.500.000 Rp 40.500.000
0 0
10 225 8,9,10 675 2 Rp 81.000.000 Rp 121.500.000
0 0
Only Period
8
9 225 9 225 0 Rp Rp
0 0 - -
10 225 9,1 450 1 Rp 40.500.000 Rp 40.500.000
0 0
11 186 9,10,11 636 2 Rp 67.176.000 Rp 107.676.000
6 6
Only Period 9
10 225 10 225 0 Rp Rp
0 0 - -
11 186 10,11 411 1 Rp 33.588.000 Rp 33.588.000
6 6
12 216 10,11,1 627 2 Rp 77.760.000 Rp 111.348.000
0 2 6
Only Period 10
11 186 11 186 0 Rp Rp
6 6 - -
12 216 11,12 402 1 Rp 38.880.000 Rp 38.880.000
0 6
13 216 11,12,1 618 2 Rp 77.760.000 Rp 116.640.000
0 3 6
Only Period 11
12 216 12 216 0 Rp Rp
0 0 - -
13 216 12,13 432 1 Rp 38.880.000 Rp 38.880.000
0 0
14 216 12,13,1 648 2 Rp 77.760.000 Rp 116.640.000
0 4 0
Only Period 12
4.82
Table 4.56. LUC Method (continued)
13 2160 13 2160 0 Rp - Rp -
14 2160 13,14 4320 1 Rp 38.880.000 Rp 38.880.000
15 1440 13,14,15 5760 2 Rp 51.840.000 Rp 90.720.000
14 2160 14 2160 0 Rp - Rp -
15 1440 14,15 3600 1 Rp 25.920.000 Rp 25.920.000
16 1500 14,15,16 5100 2 Rp 54.000.000 Rp 79.920.000
15 1440 15 1440 0 Rp - Rp -
16 1500 15,16 2940 1 Rp 27.000.000 Rp 27.000.000
17 2250 15,16,17 5190 2 Rp 81.000.000 Rp 108.000.000
16 1500 16 1500 0 Rp - Rp -
17 2250 16,17 3750 1 Rp 40.500.000 Rp 40.500.000
18 2250 16,17,18 6000 2 Rp 81.000.000 Rp 121.500.000
17 2250 17 2250 0 Rp - Rp -
18 2250 17,18 4500 1 Rp 40.500.000 Rp 40.500.000
19 2250 17,18,19 6750 2 Rp 81.000.000 Rp 121.500.000
18 2250 18 2250 0 Rp - Rp -
19 2250 18,19 4500 1 Rp 40.500.000 Rp 40.500.000
20 2580 18,19,20 7080 2 Rp 92.880.000 Rp 133.380.000
19 2250 19 2250 0 Rp - Rp -
20 2580 19,20 4830 1 Rp 46.440.000 Rp 46.440.000
21 2622 19,20,21 7452 2 Rp 94.392.000 Rp 140.832.000
20 2580 20 2580 0 Rp - Rp -
21 2622 20,21 5202 1 Rp 47.196.000 Rp 47.196.000
22 2184 20,21,22 7386 2 Rp 78.624.000 Rp 125.820.000
21 2622 21 2622 0 Rp - Rp -
22 2184 21,22 4806 1 Rp 39.312.000 Rp 39.312.000
23 2622 21,22,23 7428 2 Rp 94.392.000 Rp 133.704.000
22 2184 22 2184 0 Rp - Rp -
23 2622 22,23 4806 1 Rp 47.196.000 Rp 47.196.000
24 1308 22,23,24 6114 2 Rp 47.088.000 Rp 94.284.000
4.83
Table 4.56. LUC Method (continued)
23 2622 23 2622 0 Rp - Rp -
24 1308 23,24 3930 1 Rp 23.544.000 Rp 23.544.000
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.84
Table 4.57. LUC Product D
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Lot Sizing 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250 1866
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 26
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0 0
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0 0 0
4.85
Item E
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of holding cost is calculated by formula as belows.
𝐻 = ×𝐻 ×𝐻
𝐻 = × × =
If the value of cummulative holding cost increased, so cut the period and starting
new calculation from that period to next period.
-1 8980 -1 8980 0 Rp Rp
- -
0 7772 -1,0 16752 1 Rp Rp
139.896.000 139.896.000
1 8832 -1,0,1 25584 2 Rp Rp
317.952.000 457.848.000
0 7772 0 7772 0 Rp Rp
- -
1 8832 0,1 16604 1 Rp Rp
158.976.000 158.976.000
2 9932 0,1,2 26536 2 Rp Rp
357.552.000 516.528.000
4.86
Table 4.56. LUC Method (continued)
1 8832 1 8832 0 Rp - Rp -
2 9932 1,2 18764 1 Rp 178.776.000 Rp 178.776.000
3 10080 1,2,3 28844 2 Rp 362.880.000 Rp 541.656.000
Combine only period 1
2 9932 2 9932 0 Rp - Rp -
3 10080 2,3 20012 1 Rp 181.440.000 Rp 181.440.000
4 10080 2,3,4 30092 2 Rp 362.880.000 Rp 544.320.000
Only period 2
3 10080 3 10080 0 Rp - Rp -
4 10080 3,4 20160 1 Rp 181.440.000 Rp 181.440.000
5 10080 3,4,5 30240 2 Rp 362.880.000 Rp 544.320.000
Only period 3
4 10080 4 10080 0 Rp - Rp -
5 10080 4,5 20160 1 Rp 181.440.000 Rp 181.440.000
6 10344 4,5,6 30504 2 Rp 372.384.000 Rp 553.824.000
Only period 4
5 10080 5 10080 0 Rp - Rp -
6 10344 5,6 20424 1 Rp 186.192.000 Rp 186.192.000
7 10484 5,6,7 30908 2 Rp 377.424.000 Rp 563.616.000
Only Period 5
6 10344 6 10344 0 Rp - Rp -
7 10484 6,7 20828 1 Rp 188.712.000 Rp 188.712.000
8 10500 6,7,8 31328 2 Rp 378.000.000 Rp 566.712.000
Only Period 6
4.87
Table 4.56. LUC Method (continued)
7 1048 7 1048 0 Rp Rp
4 4 - -
8 1050 7,8 2098 1 Rp Rp
0 4 189.000.000 189.000.000
9 1050 7,8,9 3148 2 Rp Rp
0 4 378.000.000 567.000.000
Only Period 7
8 1050 8 1050 0 Rp Rp
0 0 - -
9 1050 8,9 2100 1 Rp Rp
0 0 189.000.000 189.000.000
10 8964 8,9,10 2996 2 Rp Rp
4 322.704.000 511.704.000
Only Period
8
9 1050 9 1050 0 Rp Rp
0 0 - -
10 8964 9,1 1946 1 Rp Rp
4 161.352.000 161.352.000
11 9884 9,10,11 2934 2 Rp Rp
8 355.824.000 517.176.000
Only Period 9
10 8964 10 8964 0 Rp Rp
- -
11 9884 10,11 1884 1 Rp Rp
8 177.912.000 177.912.000
12 1008 10,11,1 2892 2 Rp Rp
0 2 8 362.880.000 540.792.000
Only Period 10
11 9884 11 9884 0 Rp Rp
- -
12 1008 11,12 1996 1 Rp Rp
0 4 181.440.000 181.440.000
13 1008 11,12,1 3004 2 Rp Rp
0 3 4 362.880.000 544.320.000
Only Period 11
12 1008 12 1008 0 Rp Rp
0 0 - -
13 1008 12,13 2016 1 Rp Rp
0 0 181.440.000 181.440.000
14 7200 12,13,1 2736 2 Rp Rp
4 0 259.200.000 440.640.000
Only Period 12
4.88
Table 4.56. LUC Method (continued)
13 10080 13 10080 0 Rp - Rp -
14 7200 13,14 17280 1 Rp 129.600.000 Rp 129.600.000
15 6960 13,14,15 24240 2 Rp 250.560.000 Rp 380.160.000
14 7200 14 7200 0 Rp - Rp -
15 6960 14,15 14160 1 Rp 125.280.000 Rp 125.280.000
16 10000 14,15,16 24160 2 Rp 360.000.000 Rp 485.280.000
15 6960 15 6960 0 Rp - Rp -
16 10000 15,16 16960 1 Rp 180.000.000 Rp 180.000.000
17 10500 15,16,17 27460 2 Rp 378.000.000 Rp 558.000.000
16 10000 16 10000 0 Rp - Rp -
17 10500 16,17 20500 1 Rp 189.000.000 Rp 189.000.000
18 10500 16,17,18 31000 2 Rp 378.000.000 Rp 567.000.000
17 10500 17 10500 0 Rp - Rp -
18 10500 17,18 21000 1 Rp 189.000.000 Rp 189.000.000
19 11820 17,18,19 32820 2 Rp 425.520.000 Rp 614.520.000
18 10500 18 10500 0 Rp - Rp -
19 11820 18,19 22320 1 Rp 212.760.000 Rp 212.760.000
20 12208 18,19,20 34528 2 Rp 439.488.000 Rp 652.248.000
19 11820 19 11820 0 Rp - Rp -
20 12208 19,20 24028 1 Rp 219.744.000 Rp 219.744.000
21 10484 19,20,21 34512 2 Rp 377.424.000 Rp 597.168.000
20 12208 20 12208 0 Rp - Rp -
21 10484 20,21 22692 1 Rp 188.712.000 Rp 188.712.000
22 11944 20,21,22 34636 2 Rp 429.984.000 Rp 618.696.000
21 10484 21 10484 0 Rp - Rp -
22 11944 21,22 22428 1 Rp 214.992.000 Rp 214.992.000
23 6980 21,22,23 29408 2 Rp 251.280.000 Rp 466.272.000
22 11944 22 11944 0 Rp - Rp -
23 6980 22,23 18924 1 Rp 125.640.000 Rp 125.640.000
24 872 22,23,24 19796 2 Rp 31.392.000 Rp 157.032.000
4.89
Table 4.56. LUC Method (continued)
23 6980 23 6980 0 Rp - Rp -
24 872 23,24 7852 1 Rp 15.696.000 Rp 15.696.000
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.90
Table 4.57. LUC Product E
Period (Week) -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Lot Sizing 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964 9884
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 26
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0 0
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0 0 0
4.91
Item F
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of holding cost is calculated by formula as belows.
𝐻 = ×𝐻 ×𝐻
𝐻 = × × =
If the value of cummulative holding cost increased, so cut the period and starting
new calculation from that period to next period.
0 646 0 646 0 Rp Rp
- -
1 540 0,1 1186 1 Rp Rp
9.720.000 9.720.000
2 646 0,1,2 1832 2 Rp Rp
23.256.000 32.976.000
Combine
only period 0
1 540 1 540 0 Rp Rp
- -
2 646 1,2 1186 1 Rp Rp
11.628.000 11.628.000
3 720 1,2,3 1906 2 Rp Rp
25.920.000 37.548.000
Combine only period 1
4.92
Table 4.59. LUC Method (continued)
2 646 2 646 0 Rp - Rp -
3 720 2,3 1366 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
4 720 2,3,4 2086 2 Rp 25.920.000 Rp 38.880.000
Only period 2
3 720 3 720 0 Rp - Rp -
4 720 3,4 1440 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
5 720 3,4,5 2160 2 Rp 25.920.000 Rp 38.880.000
Only period 3
4 720 4 720 0 Rp - Rp -
5 720 4,5 1440 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
6 720 4,5,6 2160 2 Rp 25.920.000 Rp 38.880.000
Only period 4
5 720 5 720 0 Rp - Rp -
6 720 5,6 1440 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
7 742 5,6,7 2182 2 Rp 26.712.000 Rp 39.672.000
Only Period 5
6 720 6 720 0 Rp - Rp -
7 742 6,7 1462 1 Rp 13.356.000 Rp 13.356.000
8 750 6,7,8 2212 2 Rp 27.000.000 Rp 40.356.000
Only Period 6
7 742 7 742 0 Rp - Rp -
8 750 7,8 1492 1 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 13.500.000
9 750 7,8,9 2242 2 Rp 27.000.000 Rp 40.500.000
Only Period 7
4.93
Table 4.59. LUC Method (continued)
8 750 8 750 0 Rp - Rp -
9 750 8,9 1500 1 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 13.500.000
10 750 8,9,10 2250 2 Rp 27.000.000 Rp 40.500.000
Only Period 8
9 750 9 750 0 Rp - Rp -
10 750 9,1 1500 1 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 13.500.000
11 622 9,10,11 2122 2 Rp 22.392.000 Rp 35.892.000
Only Period 9
10 750 10 750 0 Rp - Rp -
11 622 10,11 1372 1 Rp 11.196.000 Rp 11.196.000
12 720 10,11,12 2092 2 Rp 25.920.000 Rp 37.116.000
Only Period 10
11 622 11 622 0 Rp - Rp -
12 720 11,12 1342 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
13 720 11,12,13 2062 2 Rp 25.920.000 Rp 38.880.000
Only Period 11
12 720 12 720 0 Rp - Rp -
13 720 12,13 1440 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
14 720 12,13,14 2160 2 Rp 25.920.000 Rp 38.880.000
Only Period 12
4.94
Table 4.59. LUC Method (continued)
13 720 13 720 0 Rp - Rp -
14 720 13,14 1440 1 Rp 12.960.000 Rp 12.960.000
15 480 13,14,15 1920 2 Rp 17.280.000 Rp 30.240.000
14 720 14 720 0 Rp - Rp -
15 480 14,15 1200 1 Rp 8.640.000 Rp 8.640.000
16 500 14,15,16 1700 2 Rp 18.000.000 Rp 26.640.000
15 480 15 480 0 Rp - Rp -
16 500 15,16 980 1 Rp 9.000.000 Rp 9.000.000
17 750 15,16,17 1730 2 Rp 27.000.000 Rp 36.000.000
16 500 16 500 0 Rp - Rp -
17 750 16,17 1250 1 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 13.500.000
18 750 16,17,18 2000 2 Rp 27.000.000 Rp 40.500.000
17 750 17 750 0 Rp - Rp -
18 750 17,18 1500 1 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 13.500.000
19 750 17,18,19 2250 2 Rp 27.000.000 Rp 40.500.000
18 750 18 750 0 Rp - Rp -
19 750 18,19 1500 1 Rp 13.500.000 Rp 13.500.000
20 860 18,19,20 2360 2 Rp 30.960.000 Rp 44.460.000
19 750 19 750 0 Rp - Rp -
20 860 19,20 1610 1 Rp 15.480.000 Rp 15.480.000
21 874 19,20,21 2484 2 Rp 31.464.000 Rp 46.944.000
20 860 20 860 0 Rp - Rp -
21 874 20,21 1734 1 Rp 15.732.000 Rp 15.732.000
22 728 20,21,22 2462 2 Rp 26.208.000 Rp 41.940.000
21 874 21 874 0 Rp - Rp -
22 728 21,22 1602 1 Rp 13.104.000 Rp 13.104.000
23 874 21,22,23 2476 2 Rp 31.464.000 Rp 44.568.000
22 728 22 728 0 Rp - Rp -
23 874 22,23 1602 1 Rp 15.732.000 Rp 15.732.000
24 436 22,23,24 2038 2 Rp 15.696.000 Rp 31.428.000
4.95
Table 4.59. LUC Method (continued)
23 874 23 874 0 Rp - Rp -
24 436 23,24 1310 1 Rp 7.848.000 Rp 7.848.000
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.96
Table 4.60. LUC Product F
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Lot Sizing 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750 622
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 26
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0 0 0
4.97
4.5. Silver Meal
Silver meal approach focuses on lot size that should be able to minimize the total
cost (holding and ordering cost) per period. The lot-for-lot conducted in each items,
such as belows. All of items are assumed, has same lead time equal with 1 week,
no safety stock, ordering cost per week is Rp 3.000.000 and holding cost is Rp
18.000/unit/month.
To calculate the total cost for producing product X by using this lot size technique,
so calculate the total holding and ordering cost in each items, such as product X,
item B, C, D, E, and F. The summary of calculations are shown as belows. The total
cost by using Silver Meal is Rp 472.800.000.
PART COST
X Rp 79.800.000
B Rp 78.000.000
C Rp 78.000.000
D Rp 78.000.000
E Rp 81.000.000
F Rp 78.000.000
TOTAL COST ALL Rp 472.800.000
PART
For detail calculation of each part and POR, are showed on the next page.
Product X
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of cummulative cost is calculated by formula as belows.
= + ×𝐻 ×𝐻
=
#
4.98
For example, 1st period, so the calculation of cummulative cost and cost per period
as belows.
= + × × =
= =
If the value of cost/period increased, so cut the period and starting new calculation
from that period to next period.
Perio Net Trial Trial Lot Size Cummulative Cost per Period
d Requireme periods Cost
nts Combined (Cum. Net (IDR) (IDR)
Req)
1 307 1 307 Rp Rp
3.000.000 3.000.000
2 323 1,2 630 Rp Rp
8.814.000 4.407.000
3 270 1,2,3 900 Rp Rp
18.534.000 6.178.000
Combine only
period 1
2 323 2 323 Rp Rp
3.000.000 3.000.000
3 270 2,3 593 Rp Rp
7.860.000 3.930.000
4 323 2,3,4 916 Rp Rp
19.488.000 6.496.000
Only period 2
3 270 3 270 Rp Rp
3.000.000 3.000.000
4 323 3,4 593 Rp Rp
8.814.000 4.407.000
5 360 3,4,5 953 Rp Rp
21.774.000 7.258.000
Only period 3
4 323 4 323Rp Rp
3.000.000 3.000.000
5 360 4,5 683 Rp Rp
9.480.000 4.740.000
6 360 4,5,6 1043 Rp Rp
22.440.000 7.480.000
4.99
Table 4.63. Silver Meal Method (continued)
4.100
Table 4.63. Silver Meal Method (continued)
4.101
Table 4.63. Silver Meal Method (continued)
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.102
Table 4.64. Silver Meal Product X
Period (Week) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 377 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Schedule Receipt
Beginning Inventory 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Lot Sizing 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
4.103
Item B
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of cummulative cost is calculated by formula as belows.
= + ×𝐻 ×𝐻
=
#
For example, 1st period, so the calculation of cummulative cost and cost per period
as belows.
= + × × =
= =
If the value of cost/period increased, so cut the period and starting new calculation
from that period to next period.
4.104
Table 4.63. Silver Meal Method (continued)
4.105
Table 4.63. Silver Meal Method (continued)
4.106
Table 4.63. Silver Meal Method (continued)
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.107
Table 4.64. Silver Meal Product B
Period (Week) -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Lot Sizing 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
4.108
Item C
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of cummulative cost is calculated by formula as belows.
= + ×𝐻 ×𝐻
=
#
For example, 1st period, so the calculation of cummulative cost and cost per period
as belows.
= + × × =
= =
If the value of cost/period increased, so cut the period and starting new calculation
from that period to next period.
4.109
Table 4.66. Silver Meal Method (continued)
4.110
Table 4.66. Silver Meal Method (continued)
13 360 13 360 Rp 3.000.000 Rp 3.000.000
14 360 13,14 720 Rp 9.480.000 Rp 4.740.000
15 360 13,14,15 1080 Rp 22.440.000 Rp 7.480.000
4.111
Table 4.66. Silver Meal Method (continued)
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.112
Table 4.67. Silver Meal Product C
Period (Week) -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Lot Sizing 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
4.113
Item D
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of cummulative cost is calculated by formula as belows.
= + ×𝐻 ×𝐻
=
#
For example, 1st period, so the calculation of cummulative cost and cost per period
as belows.
= + × × =
= =
If the value of cost/period increased, so cut the period and starting new calculation
from that period to next period.
0 1938 0 1938 Rp Rp
3.000.000 3.000.000
1 1620 0,1 3558 Rp Rp
32.160.000 16.080.000
2 1938 0,1,2 5496 Rp Rp
101.928.000 33.976.000
4.114
Table 4.70. Silver Meal Method (continued)
4.115
Table 4.71. Silver Meal Method (continued)
4.116
Table 4.71. Silver Meal Method (continued)
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.117
Table 4.72. Silver Meal Product D
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Lot Sizing 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250 1866
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0 0
4.118
Item E
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of cummulative cost is calculated by formula as belows.
= + ×𝐻 ×𝐻
=
#
For example, 1st period, so the calculation of cummulative cost and cost per period
as belows.
= + × × =
= =
If the value of cost/period increased, so cut the period and starting new calculation
from that period to next period.
-1 8980 -1 8980Rp Rp
3.000.000 3.000.000
0 7772 -1,0 16752 Rp Rp
142.896.000 71.448.000
1 8832 -1,0,1 25584 Rp Rp
460.848.000 153.616.000
4.119
Table 4.74. Silver Meal Method (continued)
Rp Rp
0 7772 0 7772
3.000.000 3.000.000
Rp Rp
1 8832 0,1 16604
161.976.000 80.988.000
Rp Rp
2 9932 0,1,2 26536
519.528.000 173.176.000
Combine only period
0
Rp Rp
1 8832 1 8832
3.000.000 3.000.000
Rp Rp
2 9932 1,2 18764
181.776.000 90.888.000
1008 Rp Rp
3 1,2,3 28844
0 544.656.000 181.552.000
Combine only period 1
Rp Rp
2 9932 2 9932
3.000.000 3.000.000
1008 Rp Rp
3 2,3 20012
0 184.440.000 92.220.000
1008 Rp Rp
4 2,3,4 30092
0 547.320.000 182.440.000
Only period 2
1008 Rp Rp
3 3 10080
0 3.000.000 3.000.000
1008 Rp Rp
4 3,4 20160
0 184.440.000 92.220.000
1008 Rp Rp
5 3,4,5 30240
0 547.320.000 182.440.000
Only period 3
1008 Rp Rp
4 4 10080
0 3.000.000 3.000.000
1008 Rp Rp
5 4,5 20160
0 184.440.000 92.220.000
1034 Rp Rp
6 4,5,6 30504
4 556.824.000 185.608.000
Only period 4
1008 Rp Rp
5 5 10080
0 3.000.000 3.000.000
1034 Rp Rp
6 5,6 20424
4 189.192.000 94.596.000
1048 Rp Rp
7 5,6,7 30908
4 566.616.000 188.872.000
Only Period 5
4.120
Table 4.74. Silver Meal Method (continued)
4.121
Table 4.74. Silver Meal Method (continued)
4.122
Table 4.74. Silver Meal Method (continued)
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.123
Table 4.75. Silver Meal Product E
Period (Week) -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Lot Sizing 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964 9884
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0 0
4.124
Item F
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. The value of cummulative cost is calculated by formula as belows.
= + ×𝐻 ×𝐻
=
#
For example, 1st period, so the calculation of cummulative cost and cost per period
as belows.
= + × × =
= =
If the value of cost/period increased, so cut the period and starting new calculation
from that period to next period.
Perio Net Trial Trial Lot Size Cummulative Cost per unit
d Requireme periods Cost
nts Combined (Cum. Net (IDR) (IDR)
Req)
-1 614 -1 614 Rp Rp
3.000.000 3.000.000
0 646 -1,0 1260 Rp Rp
14.628.000 7.314.000
1 540 -1,0,1 1800 Rp Rp
34.068.000 11.356.000
0 646 0 646 Rp Rp
3.000.000 3.000.000
1 540 0,1 1186 Rp Rp
12.720.000 6.360.000
2 646 0,1,2 1832 Rp Rp
35.976.000 11.992.000
4.125
Table 4.77. Silver Meal Method (continued)
4.126
Table 4.77. Silver Meal Method (continued)
4.127
Table 4.77. Silver Meal Method (continued)
From the calculation above, it showed that each lot cover one period only, because
after first period, the unit/cost get increased, so cutting the period. The data of each
lot in period, will be used for making the POR on the next page.
4.128
Table 4.78. Silver Meal Product F
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Lot Sizing 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750 622
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0 0
4.129
4.6. Wagner-Whithin (WW)
Wagner-Within method is part of dynamic lot sizing models (DLS). Wagner-
Within has the same objective as some of the heuristic approach which is
minimizing the variable inventory cost, ordering cost (setup cost) and holding cost
over the planning horizon. The lot-for-lot conducted in each items, such as belows.
All of items are assumed, has same lead time equal with 1 week, no safety stock,
ordering cost per week is Rp 3.000.000 and holding cost is Rp 18.000/unit/month.
To calculate the total cost for producing product X by using this lot size technique,
so calculate the total holding and ordering cost in each items, such as product X,
item B, C, D, E, and F. The summary of calculations are shown as belows. The total
cost by using Wagner-Whitin is Rp 472.800.000.
PART COST
X Rp 79.800.000
B Rp 78.000.000
C Rp 78.000.000
D Rp 78.000.000
E Rp 81.000.000
F Rp 78.000.000
TOTAL COST ALL Rp 472.800.000
PART
For detail calculation of each part and POR, are showed on the next page.
4.130
Product X
Item X
Period (Week) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Net Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375 375
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
First, the value of beginning cost in each period should be calculated as belows.
= +
= +𝐻 × 𝐻
4.131
Table 4.64. WW Method
Zce
C
e=1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 3.000.000 8.814.000 18.534.000 35.976.000 61.896.000 94.296.000 133.176.000 178.536.000 231.960.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
2 6.000.000 10.860.000 22.488.000 41.928.000 67.848.000 100.248.000 139.128.000 185.874.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
3 9.000.000 14.814.000 27.774.000 47.214.000 73.134.000 105.534.000 145.602.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
4 12.000.000 18.480.000 31.440.000 50.880.000 76.800.000 110.190.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
5 15.000.000 21.480.000 34.440.000 53.880.000 80.592.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp
6 18.000.000 24.480.000 37.440.000 57.474.000
Rp Rp Rp
7 21.000.000 27.480.000 40.836.000
Rp Rp
8 24.000.000 30.678.000
Rp
9 27.000.000
4.132
Table 4.64. WW Method (continued)
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
0 30.000.000 36.750.000 50.250.000 67.044.000 92.964.000 125.364.000 164.244.000 194.484.000 230.484.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 33.000.000 39.750.000 50.946.000 70.386.000 96.306.000 128.706.000 154.626.000 186.126.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
2 36.000.000 41.598.000 54.558.000 73.998.000 99.918.000 121.518.000 148.518.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
3 39.000.000 45.480.000 58.440.000 77.880.000 95.160.000 117.660.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
4 42.000.000 48.480.000 61.440.000 74.400.000 92.400.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp
5 45.000.000 51.480.000 60.120.000 73.620.000
1 Rp Rp Rp
6 48.000.000 52.320.000 61.320.000
1 Rp Rp
7 51.000.000 55.500.000
1 Rp
8 54.000.000
4.133
Table 4.64. WW Method (continued)
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
9 57.000.000 63.750.000 77.250.000 100.470.000 131.934.000 164.694.000 211.890.000 239.358.000
2 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
0 60.000.000 66.750.000 82.230.000 105.828.000 132.036.000 171.366.000 194.910.000
2 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 63.000.000 70.740.000 86.472.000 106.128.000 137.592.000 157.212.000
2 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
2 66.000.000 73.866.000 86.970.000 110.568.000 126.264.000
2 Rp Rp Rp Rp
3 69.000.000 75.552.000 91.284.000 103.056.000
2 Rp Rp Rp
4 72.000.000 79.866.000 87.714.000
2 Rp Rp
5 75.000.000 78.924.000
2 Rp
6 78.000.000
Cell that is colored by yellow,it is mean that lowest cost at that period. From the table above, it is showed that each lot will cover only
one period, because each lowest cost is located at the end of period. The calculation of POR and total cost will be showed on the next
page.
4.134
Table 4.65. POR Product X
Period (Week) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 377 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Schedule Receipt
Beginning Inventory 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Lot Sizing 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
4.135
Item B
Period (Week) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750 622
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
First, the value of beginning cost in each period should be calculated as belows.
= +
= +𝐻 × 𝐻
4.136
Table 4.68. WW Method
Zce
C
e=0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
0 3.000.000 14.628.000 34.068.000 68.952.000 120.792.000 185.592.000 263.352.000 354.072.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 6.000.000 15.720.000 38.976.000 77.856.000 129.696.000 194.496.000 272.256.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
2 9.000.000 20.628.000 46.548.000 85.428.000 137.268.000 202.068.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
3 12.000.000 24.960.000 50.880.000 89.760.000 141.600.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp
4 15.000.000 27.960.000 53.880.000 92.760.000
Rp Rp Rp
5 18.000.000 30.960.000 56.880.000
Rp Rp
6 21.000.000 33.960.000
Rp
7 24.000.000
4.137
Table 4.68. WW Method (continued)
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
Rp Rp Rp 108.000.00 152.784.00 217.584.00 295.344.00 386.064.00 455.184.00 536.184.00
8 27.000.000 40.500.000 67.500.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
Rp Rp Rp 104.088.00 155.928.00 220.728.00 298.488.00 358.968.00 430.968.00
9 30.000.000 43.500.000 70.500.000 0 0 0 0 0 0
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 Rp Rp Rp 107.772.00 159.612.00 224.412.00 276.252.00 339.252.00
0 33.000.000 46.500.000 68.892.000 0 0 0 0 0
Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 Rp Rp Rp 111.996.00 163.836.00 207.036.00 261.036.00
1 36.000.000 47.196.000 73.116.000 0 0 0 0
Rp Rp Rp
1 Rp Rp Rp 116.760.00 151.320.00 196.320.00
2 39.000.000 51.960.000 77.880.000 0 0 0
Rp Rp
1 Rp Rp Rp 106.800.00 142.800.00
3 42.000.000 54.960.000 80.880.000 0 0
Rp
1 Rp Rp Rp 102.240.00
4 45.000.000 57.960.000 75.240.000 0
4.138
Table 4.68. WW Method (continued)
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
5 48.000.000 56.640.000 74.640.000 115.140.000 169.140.000 236.640.000 329.520.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
6 51.000.000 60.000.000 87.000.000 127.500.000 181.500.000 258.900.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
7 54.000.000 67.500.000 94.500.000 135.000.000 196.920.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp
8 57.000.000 70.500.000 97.500.000 143.940.000
1 Rp Rp Rp
9 60.000.000 73.500.000 104.460.000
2 Rp Rp
0 63.000.000 78.480.000
2 Rp
1 66.000.000
4.139
Table 4.68. WW Method (continued)
Cell that is colored by yellow,it is mean that lowest cost at that period. From the table above, it is showed that each lot will cover only
one period, because each lowest cost is located at the end of period. The calculation of POR and total cost will be showed on the next
page.
4.140
Table 4.69. POR Product B
Period (Week) -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Lot Sizing 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
750 622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
4.141
Item C
Period (Week) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Net Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375 375 311
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
First, the value of beginning cost in each period should be calculated as belows.
= +
= +𝐻 × 𝐻
4.142
Table 4.72. WW Method
Zce
C
e=0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
0 3.000.000 8.814.000 18.534.000 35.976.000 61.896.000 94.296.000 133.176.000 178.536.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 6.000.000 10.860.000 22.488.000 41.928.000 67.848.000 100.248.000 139.128.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
2 9.000.000 14.814.000 27.774.000 47.214.000 73.134.000 105.534.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
3 12.000.000 18.480.000 31.440.000 50.880.000 76.800.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp
4 15.000.000 21.480.000 34.440.000 53.880.000
Rp Rp Rp
5 18.000.000 24.480.000 37.440.000
Rp Rp
6 21.000.000 27.480.000
Rp
7 24.000.000
4.143
Table 4.72. WW Method (continued)
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
8 27.000.000 33.750.000 47.250.000 67.500.000 89.892.000 122.292.000 161.172.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
9 30.000.000 36.750.000 50.250.000 67.044.000 92.964.000 125.364.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
0 33.000.000 39.750.000 50.946.000 70.386.000 96.306.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 36.000.000 41.598.000 54.558.000 73.998.000
1 Rp Rp Rp
2 39.000.000 45.480.000 58.440.000
1 Rp Rp
3 42.000.000 48.480.000
1 Rp
4 45.000.000
4.144
Table 4.72. WW Method (continued)
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
5 48.000.000 52.320.000 61.320.000 81.570.000 108.570.000 142.320.000 188.760.000 243.822.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
6 51.000.000 55.500.000 69.000.000 89.250.000 116.250.000 154.950.000 202.146.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
7 54.000.000 60.750.000 74.250.000 94.500.000 125.460.000 164.790.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
8 57.000.000 63.750.000 77.250.000 100.470.000 131.934.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp
9 60.000.000 66.750.000 82.230.000 105.828.000
2 Rp Rp Rp
0 63.000.000 70.740.000 86.472.000
2 Rp Rp
1 66.000.000 73.866.000
2 Rp
2 69.000.000
4.145
Table 4.72. WW Method (continued)
Cell that is colored by yellow,it is mean that lowest cost at that period. From the table above, it is showed that each lot will cover only
one period, because each lowest cost is located at the end of period. The calculation of POR and total cost will be showed on the next
page.
4.146
Table 4.73. POR Product C
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Lot Sizing 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 307 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375 375 375
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218 0 0
4.147
Item D
Period (Week) -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Net Requirements 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250 1866 2160
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
First, the value of beginning cost in each period should be calculated as belows.
= +
= +𝐻 × 𝐻
4.148
Table 4.76. WW Method
Zce
C
e= -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rp Rp
- Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp 1.056.216.00 1.376.760.00
1 3.000.000 37.884.000 96.204.000 200.856.000 356.376.000 550.776.000 784.056.000 0 0
Rp
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp 1.085.244.00
0 6.000.000 35.160.000 104.928.000 221.568.000 377.088.000 571.488.000 804.768.000 0
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 9.000.000 43.884.000 121.644.000 238.284.000 393.804.000 588.204.000 828.612.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
2 12.000.000 50.880.000 128.640.000 245.280.000 400.800.000 601.140.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
3 15.000.000 53.880.000 131.640.000 248.280.000 408.552.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp
4 18.000.000 56.880.000 134.640.000 254.844.000
Rp Rp Rp
5 21.000.000 59.880.000 140.016.000
Rp Rp
6 24.000.000 64.068.000
Rp
7 27.000.000
4.149
Table 4.76. WW Method (continued)
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
8 30.000.000 70.500.000 151.500.000 252.264.000 407.784.000 602.184.000 835.464.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
9 33.000.000 73.500.000 140.676.000 257.316.000 412.836.000 607.236.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
0 36.000.000 69.588.000 147.348.000 263.988.000 419.508.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 39.000.000 77.880.000 155.640.000 272.280.000
1 Rp Rp Rp
2 42.000.000 80.880.000 158.640.000
1 Rp Rp
3 45.000.000 83.880.000
1 Rp
4 48.000.000
4.150
Table 4.76. WW Method (continued)
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
5 51.000.000 78.000.000 159.000.000 280.500.000 442.500.000 674.700.000 957.876.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
6 54.000.000 94.500.000 175.500.000 297.000.000 482.760.000 718.740.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
7 57.000.000 97.500.000 178.500.000 317.820.000 506.604.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp
8 60.000.000 100.500.000 193.380.000 334.968.000
1 Rp Rp Rp
9 63.000.000 109.440.000 203.832.000
2 Rp Rp
0 66.000.000 113.196.000
2 Rp
1 69.000.000
4.151
Table 4.76. WW Method (continued)
Cell that is colored by yellow,it is mean that lowest cost at that period. From the table above, it is showed that each lot will cover only
one period, because each lowest cost is located at the end of period. The calculation of POR and total cost will be showed on the next
page.
4.152
Table 4.77. POR Product D
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Lot Sizing 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 1842 1938 1620 1938 2160 2160 2160 2160 2226 2250 2250 2250 1866
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0
1866 2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2160 2160 2160 1440 1500 2250 2250 2250 2580 2622 2184 2622 1308 0 0
4.153
Item E
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Net 7368 898 777 883 9932 10080 1008 1008 1034 1048 10500 1050 896 9884 10080
Requirements 0 2 2 0 0 4 4 0 4
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 1050 1182 1220 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
0 0 8
First, the value of beginning cost in each period should be calculated as belows.
= +
= +𝐻 × 𝐻
4.154
Table 4.80. WW Method
Zce
C
e= -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
- Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
2 3.000.000 164.640.000 444.432.000 921.360.000 1.636.464.000 2.543.664.000 3.632.304.000
- Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 6.000.000 145.896.000 463.848.000 1.000.176.000 1.725.936.000 2.633.136.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
0 9.000.000 167.976.000 525.528.000 1.069.848.000 1.795.608.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 12.000.000 190.776.000 553.656.000 1.097.976.000
Rp Rp Rp
2 15.000.000 196.440.000 559.320.000
Rp Rp
3 18.000.000 199.440.000
Rp
4 21.000.000
4.155
Table 4.81. WW Method (continued)
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
5 24.000.000 210.192.000 587.616.000 1.154.616.000 1.910.616.000 2.717.376.000 3.784.848.000 5.054.928.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
6 27.000.000 215.712.000 593.712.000 1.160.712.000 1.806.120.000 2.695.680.000 3.784.320.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
7 30.000.000 219.000.000 597.000.000 1.081.056.000 1.792.704.000 2.699.904.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
8 33.000.000 222.000.000 544.704.000 1.078.440.000 1.804.200.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp
9 36.000.000 197.352.000 553.176.000 1.097.496.000
1 Rp Rp Rp
0 39.000.000 216.912.000 579.792.000
1 Rp Rp
1 42.000.000 223.440.000
1 Rp
2 45.000.000
4.156
Table 4.81. WW Method (continued)
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
3 48.000.000 177.600.000 428.160.000 968.160.000 1.724.160.000 2.669.160.000 3.945.720.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
4 51.000.000 176.280.000 536.280.000 1.103.280.000 1.859.280.000 2.923.080.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
5 54.000.000 234.000.000 612.000.000 1.179.000.000 2.030.040.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp
6 57.000.000 246.000.000 624.000.000 1.262.280.000
1 Rp Rp Rp
7 60.000.000 249.000.000 674.520.000
1 Rp Rp
8 63.000.000 275.760.000
1 Rp
9 66.000.000
4.157
Table 4.81. WW Method (continued)
Cell that is colored by yellow,it is mean that lowest cost at that period. From the table above, it is showed that each lot will cover only
one period, because each lowest cost is located at the end of period. The calculation of POR and total cost will be showed on the next
page.
4.158
Table 4.82. POR Product D
Period (Week) -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Lot Sizing 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 7368 8980 7772 8832 9932 10080 10080 10080 10344 10484 10500 10500 8964 9884
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
9884 10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10080 10080 7200 6960 10000 10500 10500 11820 12208 10484 11944 6980 872 0 0 0
4.159
Item F
Period (Week) -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750 622 720
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
First, the value of beginning cost in each period should be calculated as belows.
= +
= +𝐻 × 𝐻
4.160
Table 4.85. WW Method
Zce
C
e= -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
- Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 3.000.000 14.628.000 34.068.000 68.952.000 120.792.000 185.592.000 263.352.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
0 6.000.000 15.720.000 38.976.000 77.856.000 129.696.000 194.496.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 9.000.000 20.628.000 46.548.000 85.428.000 137.268.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp
2 12.000.000 24.960.000 50.880.000 89.760.000
Rp Rp Rp
3 15.000.000 27.960.000 53.880.000
Rp Rp
4 18.000.000 30.960.000
Rp
5 21.000.000
4.161
Table 4.85. WW Method (continued)
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
6 24.000.000 37.356.000 64.356.000 104.856.000 158.856.000 214.836.000 292.596.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
7 27.000.000 40.500.000 67.500.000 108.000.000 152.784.000 217.584.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
8 30.000.000 43.500.000 70.500.000 104.088.000 155.928.000
Rp Rp Rp Rp
9 33.000.000 46.500.000 68.892.000 107.772.000
1 Rp Rp Rp
0 36.000.000 47.196.000 73.116.000
1 Rp Rp
1 39.000.000 51.960.000
1 Rp
2 42.000.000
4.162
Table 4.85. WW Method (continued)
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
3 45.000.000 57.960.000 75.240.000 102.240.000 156.240.000 223.740.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
4 48.000.000 56.640.000 74.640.000 115.140.000 169.140.000
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp
5 51.000.000 60.000.000 87.000.000 127.500.000
1 Rp Rp Rp
6 54.000.000 67.500.000 94.500.000
1 Rp Rp
7 57.000.000 70.500.000
1 Rp
8 60.000.000
4.163
Table 4.85. WW Method (continued)
1 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
9 63.000.000 78.480.000 109.944.000 149.256.000 212.184.000 251.424.000
2 Rp Rp Rp Rp Rp
0 66.000.000 81.732.000 107.940.000 155.136.000 186.528.000
2 Rp Rp Rp Rp
1 69.000.000 82.104.000 113.568.000 137.112.000
2 Rp Rp Rp
2 72.000.000 87.732.000 103.428.000
2 Rp Rp
3 75.000.000 82.848.000
2 Rp
4 78.000.000
Cell that is colored by yellow,it is mean that lowest cost at that period. From the table above, it is showed that each lot will cover only
one period, because each lowest cost is located at the end of period. The calculation of POR and total cost will be showed on the next
page.
4.164
Table 4.86. POR Product F
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Schedule Receipt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Lot Sizing 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 614 646 540 646 720 720 720 720 742 750 750 750 622
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
622 720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
720 720 720 480 500 750 750 750 860 874 728 874 436 0 0 0
4.165
4.7. Groff’s Algorithm
Groff proposed a method that is similar to Mc Laren’s order moment method in that
it considers the addition of a future demand in a lot. The lot-for-lot conducted in
each items, such as belows. All of items are assumed, has same lead time equal with
1 week, no safety stock, ordering cost per week is Rp 3.000.000 and holding cost is
Rp 18.000/unit/month.
To calculate the total cost for producing product X by using this lot size technique,
so calculate the total holding and ordering cost in each items, such as product X,
item B, C, D, E, and F. The summary of calculations are shown as belows. The total
cost by using Groff’s Algorithm is Rp 472.800.000.
PART COST
X Rp 119.514.000
B Rp 39.000.000
C Rp 39.000.000
D Rp 39.000.000
E Rp 39.000.000
F Rp 39.000.000
TOTAL COST ALL
Rp 314.514.000
PART
For detail calculation of each part and POR, are showed on the next page.
Product X
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. A future dt included if not exceed the value of formula belows.
.
− ≤
𝐻
.
− ≤ = .
If exceed the value,so cut the period and start from that period to next period.
4.166
Table 4.89. Groff’s Algorithm Method
4.167
Table 4.89. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.168
Table 4.89. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.169
Table 4.89. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.170
Table 4.90. POR Groff’s Algorithm Method
Period (Week) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 377 323 270 323 360 360 360 360 371 375
Schedule Receipt
Beginning Inventory 70 323 0 323 0 360 0 360 0 375
Net Requirements 307 0 270 0 360 0 360 0 371 0
Lot Sizing 630 0 593 0 720 0 720 0 746 0
Ending Inventory 323 0 323 0 360 0 360 0 375 0
Planned Order Release 630 0 593 0 720 0 720 0 746 0 750
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
375 375 311 360 360 360 240 250 375 375 375 430 437 364 437 218
4.171
Item B
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. A future dt included if not exceed the value of formula belows.
.
− ≤
𝐻
.
− ≤ = .
If exceed the value,so cut the period and start from that period to next period.
4.172
Table 4.92. Groff’s Algorithm Method
4.173
Table 4.92. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.174
Table 4.92. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.175
Table 4.92. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.176
Table 4.92. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
Rp
24 1310 24 1310 0 YES
-
Rp
25 0 24,25 1310 1 YES
-
Rp
26 0 24,25,26 1310 2 YES
-
Rp
25 437 25 437 0 YES
-
Rp
26 218 25,26 655 1 YES
-
After determining the scope of period, now proceed to make planning of materials and calculate the total cost. It is showed on the next
page.
4.177
Table 4.93. POR Groff’s Algorithm Method
Period (Week) -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 1260 0 1186 0 1440 0 1440 0 1492 0 1500
Schedule Receipt
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 1260 0 1186 0 1440 0 1440 0 1492 0 1500
Lot Sizing 1260 0 1186 0 1440 0 1440 0 1492 0 1500
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 1260 0 1186 0 1440 0 1440 0 1492 0 1500 0
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
0 1342 0 1440 0 980 0 1500 0 1610 0 1602 0 1310 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1342 0 1440 0 980 0 1500 0 1610 0 1602 0 1310 0 0
0 1342 0 1440 0 980 0 1500 0 1610 0 1602 0 1310 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1342 0 1440 0 980 0 1500 0 1610 0 1602 0 1310 0 0 0
Table 4.94. Total Cost
4.178
Item C
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. A future dt included if not exceed the value of formula belows.
.
− ≤
𝐻
.
− ≤ = .
If exceed the value,so cut the period and start from that period to next period.
4.179
Table 4.95. Groff’s Algorithm Method
4.180
Table 4.95. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.181
Table 4.95. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.182
Table 4.95. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.183
Table 4.95. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
After determining the scope of period, now proceed to make planning of materials and calculate the total cost. It is showed on the next
page.
4.184
Table 4.96. POR Groff’s Algorithm Method
Period (Week) -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 630 0 593 0 720 0 720 0 746 0 750
Schedule Receipt
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 630 0 593 0 720 0 720 0 746 0 750
Lot Sizing 630 0 593 0 720 0 720 0 746 0 750
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 630 0 593 0 720 0 720 0 746 0 750 0
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
0 671 0 720 0 490 0 750 0 805 0 801 0 655 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 671 0 720 0 490 0 750 0 805 0 801 0 655 0 0
0 671 0 720 0 490 0 750 0 805 0 801 0 655 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
671 0 720 0 490 0 750 0 805 0 801 0 655 0 0 0
Table 4.97. Total Cost
4.185
Item D
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. A future dt included if not exceed the value of formula belows.
.
− ≤
𝐻
.
− ≤ = .
If exceed the value,so cut the period and start from that period to next period.
4.186
Table 4.98. Groff’s Algorithm Method
4.187
Table 4.98. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.188
Table 4.98. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.189
Table 4.98. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.190
Table 4.98. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
After determining the scope of period, now proceed to make planning of materials and calculate the total cost. It is showed on the next
page.
4.191
Table 4.99. POR Groff’s Algorithm Method
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 3780 0 3558 0 4320 0 4320 0 4476 0 4500 0
Schedule Receipt
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 3780 0 3558 0 4320 0 4320 0 4476 0 4500 0
Lot Sizing 3780 0 3558 0 4320 0 4320 0 4476 0 4500 0
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 3780 0 3558 0 4320 0 4320 0 4476 0 4500 0 4026
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
4026 0 4320 0 2940 0 4500 0 4830 0 4806 0 3930 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4026 0 4320 0 2940 0 4500 0 4830 0 4806 0 3930 0 0 0
4026 0 4320 0 2940 0 4500 0 4830 0 4806 0 3930 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 4320 0 2940 0 4500 0 4830 0 4806 0 3930 0 0 0 0
Table 4.100. Total Cost
4.192
Item E
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. A future dt included if not exceed the value of formula belows.
.
− ≤
𝐻
.
− ≤ = .
If exceed the value,so cut the period and start from that period to next period.
4.193
Table 4.101. Groff’s Algorithm Method
4.194
Table 4.101. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.195
Table 4.101. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.196
Table 4.101. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.197
Table 4.101. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
After determining the scope of period, now proceed to make planning of materials and calculate the total cost. It is showed on the next
page.
4.198
Table 4.102. POR Groff’s Algorithm Method
Period (Week) -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 15120 2520 14232 2372 17280 2880 17280 2880 17904 2984 18000 3000 16104
Schedule Receipt
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 15120 2520 14232 2372 17280 2880 17280 2880 17904 2984 18000 3000 16104
Lot Sizing 17640 0 16604 0 20160 0 20160 0 20888 0 21000 0 18788
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 17640 0 16604 0 20160 0 20160 0 20888 0 21000 0 18788 0
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
2684 17280 2880 11760 1960 18000 3000 19320 3220 19224 3204 15720 2620 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2684 17280 2880 11760 1960 18000 3000 19320 3220 19224 3204 15720 2620 0 0 0
0 20160 0 13720 0 21000 0 22540 0 22428 0 18340 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
20160 0 13720 0 21000 0 22540 0 22428 0 18340 0 0 0 0 0
Table 4.103. Total Cost
4.199
Item F
To know how many period covered by each lot, so calculation in table belows are
conducted. A future dt included if not exceed the value of formula belows.
.
− ≤
𝐻
.
− ≤ = .
If exceed the value,so cut the period and start from that period to next period.
4.200
Table 4.104. Groff’s Algorithm Method
4.201
Table 4.104. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.202
Table 4.104. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.203
Table 4.104. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
4.204
Table 4.104. Groff’s Algorithm Method (continued)
After determining the scope of period, now proceed to make planning of materials and calculate the total cost. It is showed on the next
page.
4.205
Table 4.105. POR Groff’s Algorithm Method
Period (Week) -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gross Requirements 1260 0 1186 0 1440 0 1440 0 1492 0 1500 0
Schedule Receipt
Beginning Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Net Requirements 1260 0 1186 0 1440 0 1440 0 1492 0 1500 0
Lot Sizing 1260 0 1186 0 1440 0 1440 0 1492 0 1500 0
Ending Inventory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Planned Order Release 1260 0 1186 0 1440 0 1440 0 1492 0 1500 0 1342
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1342 0 1440 0 980 0 1500 0 1610 0 1602 0 1310 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1342 0 1440 0 980 0 1500 0 1610 0 1602 0 1310 0 0 0
1342 0 1440 0 980 0 1500 0 1610 0 1602 0 1310 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1440 0 980 0 1500 0 1610 0 1602 0 1310 0 0 0 0
Table 4.106. Total Cost
4.206
4.8. Comparation of Lot Size Technique
In this report, there are several lot sizing technique that have been used. Each
technique will has own total cost. In order to minimize cost, so from several
alternatives, the lowest cost will be choosen. The comparasion of total cost in each
lot size technique as belows.
Table 4.107. Comparation of Lot Sizing Technique
From the comparation above, it is showed that Groff’s Algorithm has lowest total
cost, so it is choosen as the best lot sizing technique. The POR for next six months
are shown on the next page.
4.207
Table 4.108. Summary of POR (Groof’s Algorithm)
Period (Week) -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4.208
The summary of all methods are shown as belows.
Table 4.110. Comparation of All Methods
The method with lowest cost will be choosen, which is Groff’s Algorithm. The
result of MRP from this method is shown on the next page.
4.209
Table 4.111. Summary of POR (Groof’s Algorithm)
Period -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(Week)
X 0 0 0 630 0 593 0 720 0 720 0 746 0 750
B 0 0 1260 0 1186 0 1440 0 1440 0 1492 0 1500 0
C 0 0 630 0 593 0 720 0 720 0 746 0 750 0
D 0 3780 0 3558 0 4320 0 4320 0 4476 0 4500 0 4026
E 17640 0 16604 0 20160 0 20160 0 20888 0 2100 0 18788 0
0
F 0 1260 0 1186 0 1440 0 1440 0 1492 0 1500 0 1342
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
0 671 0 720 0 490 0 750 0 805 0 801 0 65 0 0
5
1342 0 1440 0 980 0 1500 0 1610 0 1602 0 1310 0 0 0
671 0 720 0 490 0 750 0 805 0 801 0 655 0 0 0
0 432 0 2940 0 4500 0 4830 0 4806 0 3930 0 0 0 0
0
20160 0 1372 0 2100 0 2254 0 2242 0 1834 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 8 0
0 144 0 980 0 1500 0 1610 0 1602 0 1310 0 0 0 0
0
4.210
CHAPTER V
CONCLUSION
In this report, there are several lot sizing technique conducted, such as LFL, POQ,
LUC, LTC, Silver Meal, Wagner-Whitin (WW), and Groff’s Algorithm. And then,
there are calculation of holding and order cost conducted for all lot sizing technique.
At the end, the lowest cost from all lot sizing technique is Groff’s Algorithm. The
total cost is Rp314.514.000. And then, the POR has been calculated by using the
Groff’s Algorithm lot sizing. The result are shown in Ch 4 Data Analysis.
4.211
REFERENCE
Sipper, D., & Bulfin. JR, R. L. (1997). Production : Planning, Control, and
Integration. New York City: McGraw Hill Education.
4.212
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER I ..................................................................................................................... 5.2
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 5.2
1.1 Background ...................................................................................................... 5.2
1.2 Objectives .............................................................................................................. 5.3
1.3 Tools and Equipment(s)......................................................................................... 5.3
1.4 Steps ...................................................................................................................... 5.3
CHAPTER II.................................................................................................................... 5.4
LITERATURE STUDY................................................................................................... 5.4
2.1 Rough Cut Capacity Planning (RCCP).................................................................. 5.4
2.2 Capacity Requirements Planning (CRP) ............................................................... 5.6
2.3 Capacity-Load Relationship .................................................................................. 5.7
2.4 Capacity Requirement Planning System ............................................................... 5.8
2.4.1. CRP Input..................................................................................................... 5.8
2.4.2. CRP Process ...................................................................................................... 5.9
2.4.3. CRP Output .................................................................................................. 5.9
2.5 Balancing Capacity and Load .............................................................................. 5.10
2.6 The Advantages and Disadvantages of CRP ....................................................... 5.12
2.7 Capacity Requirement Planning Analysis ........................................................... 5.13
CHAPTER III ................................................................................................................ 5.14
DATA COLLECTION .................................................................................................. 5.14
3.1. Product Structure ........................................................................................... 5.14
3.2. Bill of Materials ............................................................................................. 5.14
3.3. Routing File ................................................................................................... 5.15
3.4. Revised MPS.................................................................................................. 5.16
3.5. Planned Order Released (POR)...................................................................... 5.17
CHAPTER IV ................................................................................................................ 5.18
DATA ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................ 5.18
4.1 Routing Data ........................................................................................................ 5.18
4.2. Bill of Capacity................................................................................................... 5.19
4.3. Total Required Capacity ..................................................................................... 5.19
4.4. Capacity Requirements Planning (CRP) ............................................................ 5.21
CHAPTER V ................................................................................................................. 5.61
CONCLUSION .............................................................................................................. 5.61
REFERENCE ................................................................................................................. 5.62
5.1
CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background
In production and project management, a bottleneck is one of the process in a chain
management, such that its limited capacity reduces the capacity of whole chain. The
result of having a bottleneck are stalls in production, supply overstock, pressure
from customers and low employee morale. Almost every system has a bottleneck,
even if it is a minor one. If every system was running at full capacity, at least one
machine would be accumulating processes. Identifying bottlenecks is critical for
improving efficiency in the production line because it allows the company to
determine the area where accumulation occurs. The machine or process that
accumulates the longest queue is usually bottleneck, however this isn’t always the
case. Bottlenecks can be found through identifying the areas where accumulation
occurs, evaluating the throughput, assessing whether each machine is being used at
full capacity and finding the machine with the high wait time.
5.2
on open shop orders and planned shop orders. Work begins on open shop orders
while planned shop orders are scheduled to be done by each work center and time
period.
1.2 Objectives
The objectives in this report are:
1.4 Steps
There are several steps to analyze the data, which are:
Calculating process time computation each part and work center.
Calculating Rough Cut Capacity Requirements by each work center and time
Define the required capacity by Planned Order Released (POR)
Define the total required capacity
Compare the available capacity with required capacity
Conclude the results
5.3
CHAPTER II
LITERATURE STUDY
5.4
Basically there are four steps needed to implement RCCP, namely:
1. Obtain information about production plans from MPS.
2. Obtaining information about product structure and lead times.
3. Determine the bill of resources.
4. Calculate specific resource requirements and create an RCCP report.
𝑖 𝑖
Machine Load = ℎ𝑖
(2-1)
Work center setup time = Maximum machine setup time at work center (2-3)
Setup time
Waktu proses = Run Time (2-4)
Averagelot size
𝑖
Proportion = (2-5)
𝑖
5.5
Total Capacity Requirement=Number of MPS per period x total Process time
(2-6)
Total Capacity Requirement each Work Center = Proportion x Total Capacity
Requirement
(2-7)
MRP, when used on CRP as the base input, considers on hand inventories of
components in determining the need for planned orders. In addition, information
about the open production order of the open file order is used. So, CRP is clean
planning. Therefore, unlike resource planning and RCCP, CRP considers the
availability of inventory from components. In addition, as data on the planning and
availability of orders are used, the specific effect of lot sizing is on the number of
setups and the periods in which the existing capacity should be considered. MRP
assumes that what is scheduled is applicable, regardless of capacity constraints.
Sometimes this assumption is valid, but sometimes it can not be fulfilled.
Capacity Requirements Planning (CRP) tests these assumptions and identifies areas
that are overloaded and under loaded, so planners can take appropriate action. CRP
compares the loads assigned to each work center through open and planned orders
5.6
created by the MRP, with the capacity available at each work center within each
time period of the planning horizon. Unlike MRP systems that create new planned
orders to avoid future material or item shortages, CRP systems do not create,
reschedule, or delete any orders.
CRP is a function of determining, measuring, and adjusting the capacity or process
level to determine the amount of labor and machine resources required to carry out
production. CRP is a detailed capacity calculation technique required by MRP. CRP
verifies the availability of capacity adequacy during the planning range.
The following data are required to perform CRP calculations:
- BOMB
- The parent data of each component
- MPS for each component
- Routing each component
- Work Center Master File
Based on CRP, the next process is to calculate the MRP and then recapitulated into
an order implementation plan (Planned Order Release).
5.7
and implementation capabilities to adjust the order arrival rate and capacity. The
unit of measurement of the burden and the most capacity uses hours of work during
a certain time interval.
5.8
work stations, number of working days per period, number of shifts
scheduled per working day, number of working hours per shift, utilization
factor, efficiency factor, queue time average, average waiting and moving
time.
5.9
while also identifying whether overloads or underloads occur. CRP usually
produces a work center load profile for each work center identified in the
factory. Comparison between load and capacity can also be displayed in
column format.
Revised schedule of planned factory order releases. This revised timeline
illustrates that the output of the MRP is adjusted to the specific release dates
for factory orders based on capacity limitations. The improvement of
schedule of planned factory order releases is indirect output of the CRP
process because they are the result of human judgments based on the
analysis of the work center load reports. One possible adjustment option, in
addition to capacity change, is to change the plannned start dates made
through the MRP plan. This has the effect of shifting the load between
periods of time to achieve a better balance.
1. Increasing Capacity
Add extra shifts.
Scheduling overtime or working on weekends.
Add equipment and / or personnel.
Subcontracted one or more shop orders.
2. Reducing Capacity
Eliminate shifts or reduce the length of shifts.
5.10
Reassign personnel temporarily (JIT suggests the use of this time
for investment in labor education, or maintenance of equipment
and facilities).
3. Increase Load
Early order release (release orders early) from the scheduled.
Increase lot size (lot size).
Increase MPS.
Create items that are normally purchased or subcontracted.
5. Redistributing Load
Using alternate work centers.
Using alternate routings.
Adjust the start date of operation forward or backward (earlier or
later).
Hold some jobs in production controls to slow manufacturing
manufacturing orders.
Fixed MPS.
5.11
2.6 The Advantages and Disadvantages of CRP
There are several advantages and disadvantages of CRP according to Gaspersz,
namely:
Advantages of CRP:
Provides time-phased visibility of capacity and load imbalances.
Confirm that enough capacity exists on a cumulative basis along the
planning horizon.
Consider the specific lot size and routings.
Uses faster lead time estimates than MRP.
Eliminate erratic lead times by providing data to smooth the load
throughout the work centers.
However, in the absence of CRP analysis, the following consequences may arise:
bottlenecks, work in inventory processes being high, waiting times become longer,
delays in delivery and product shortages, inefficient use of resources, productivity
down and others.
5.12
2.7 Capacity Requirement Planning Analysis
CRP analysis requires separate calculations with respect to setup time and run time
requirements. CRP analysis is more detailed than RCCP, when CRP analysis
requires information about standard setup time and standard run time per unit of
items to be created. Calculation of operation time per unit in CRP analysis using
the following formula:
𝑖 𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 𝑖 = +
𝑖 𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 /𝐿
= 𝑖
+𝐴 𝐿 𝑖𝑧
(2-8)
Basically there are several steps needed to carry out CRP analysis, namely:
1. Obtain information about planned order release from MRP.
2. Obtain information about standard run time per unit and standard setup
time per lot size.
3. Calculate the required capacity of each work center.
4. Creating CRP reports.
5.13
CHAPTER III
DATA COLLECTION
In this report, there will be a detail analysis towards the capacity required by MRP.
There are several inputs for CRP calculations such as belows.
3.1.Product Structure
Below is the product structure in order to produce product X. There are several
items, such as item B, C, D, E, and F.
3.2.Bill of Materials
From the product structure and BOM, it is showed that in producing one product X,
it need 2 items B, 1 item C, 6 items D, 28 items E, and 2 items F.
Part/Item Quantity
X 1
B 2
C 1
D 6
E 28
F 2
5.14
3.3.Routing File
Below are shown the routing data files of each item.
Table 3.2. Routing Data
5.15
3.4.Revised MPS
Through CRP, there are comparation between required capacity planning and
available capacity. After revise the MPS, the result are shown as belows.
5.16
3.5.Planned Order Released (POR)
From the MRP calculation, the best method are choosen which is Groff’s Algorithm method choosen and the result of POR are shown
below.
Table 3.4. Summary of POR (Groof’s Algorithm)
Period -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(Week)
X 0 0 0 630 0 593 0 720 0 720 0 746 0 750
B 0 0 1260 0 1186 0 1440 0 1440 0 1492 0 1500 0
C 0 0 630 0 593 0 720 0 720 0 746 0 750 0
D 0 3780 0 3558 0 4320 0 4320 0 4476 0 4500 0 4026
E 17640 0 16604 0 20160 0 20160 0 20888 0 2100 0 18788 0
0
F 0 1260 0 1186 0 1440 0 1440 0 1492 0 1500 0 1342
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
0 671 0 720 0 490 0 750 0 805 0 801 0 65 0 0
5
1342 0 1440 0 980 0 1500 0 1610 0 1602 0 1310 0 0 0
671 0 720 0 490 0 750 0 805 0 801 0 655 0 0 0
0 432 0 2940 0 4500 0 4830 0 4806 0 3930 0 0 0 0
0
20160 0 1372 0 2100 0 2254 0 2242 0 1834 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 8 0
0 144 0 980 0 1500 0 1610 0 1602 0 1310 0 0 0 0
0
5.17
CHAPTER IV
DATA ANALYSIS
𝑖
= + 𝑖
𝐸
= + , = , 𝑖
= × 𝑖𝑦
5.18
Table 4.1. Routing Data (continued)
E 102 10 0,72 20 1,22 28 34,16
104 10 0,6 20 1,10 28 30,80
107 15 0,48 20 1,23 28 34,44
108 0 0,81 20 0,81 28 22,68
F 101 10 1,5 25 1,90 2 3,80
104 10 1,36 25 1,76 2 3,52
105 30 2,1 25 3,30 2 6,60
106 15 1,1 25 1,70 2 3,40
108 0 1,45 25 1,45 2 2,90
𝑖𝑦= / 𝑖 × 𝑖 /
5.19
Table 4.3. Total Required Capacity
Work Center
Week
Assembly Inspection 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
Week 1 475,20 633,60 7709,33 21574,08 2805,00 21212,40 3564,00 7500,24 18687,24 10129,68
Week 2 406,80 542,40 6599,65 18468,72 2401,25 18159,10 3051,00 6420,66 15997,41 8671,62
Week 3 339,60 452,80 5509,44 15417,84 2004,58 15159,37 2547,00 5360,02 13354,77 7239,14
Week 4 406,80 542,40 6599,65 18468,72 2401,25 18159,10 3051,00 6420,66 15997,41 8671,62
Week 5 457,20 609,60 7417,31 20756,88 2698,75 20408,90 3429,00 7216,14 17979,39 9745,98
Week 6 457,20 609,60 7417,31 20756,88 2698,75 20408,90 3429,00 7216,14 17979,39 9745,98
Week 7 457,20 609,60 7417,31 20756,88 2698,75 20408,90 3429,00 7216,14 17979,39 9745,98
Week 8 457,20 609,60 7417,31 20756,88 2698,75 20408,90 3429,00 7216,14 17979,39 9745,98
Week 9 464,40 619,20 7534,12 21083,76 2741,25 20730,30 3483,00 7329,78 18262,53 9899,46
Week 10 468,00 624,00 7592,52 21247,20 2762,50 20891,00 3510,00 7386,60 18404,10 9976,20
Week 11 468,00 624,00 7592,52 21247,20 2762,50 20891,00 3510,00 7386,60 18404,10 9976,20
Week 12 468,00 624,00 7592,52 21247,20 2762,50 20891,00 3510,00 7386,60 18404,10 9976,20
Week 13 386,40 515,20 6268,70 17542,56 2280,83 17248,47 2898,00 6098,68 15195,18 8236,76
Week 14 450,00 600,00 7300,50 20430,00 2656,25 20087,50 3375,00 7102,50 17696,25 9592,50
Week 15 450,00 600,00 7300,50 20430,00 2656,25 20087,50 3375,00 7102,50 17696,25 9592,50
Week 16 450,00 600,00 7300,50 20430,00 2656,25 20087,50 3375,00 7102,50 17696,25 9592,50
Week 17 300,00 400,00 4867,00 13620,00 1770,83 13391,67 2250,00 4735,00 11797,50 6395,00
Week 18 315,60 420,80 5120,08 14328,24 1862,92 14088,03 2367,00 4981,22 12410,97 6727,54
Week 19 472,80 630,40 7670,39 21465,12 2790,83 21105,27 3546,00 7462,36 18592,86 10078,52
Week 20 472,80 630,40 7670,39 21465,12 2790,83 21105,27 3546,00 7462,36 18592,86 10078,52
Week 21 472,80 630,40 7670,39 21465,12 2790,83 21105,27 3546,00 7462,36 18592,86 10078,52
Week 22 516,00 688,00 8371,24 23426,40 3045,83 23033,67 3870,00 8144,20 20291,70 10999,40
5.20
Table 4.3. Total Required Capacity (continued)
Week 23 560,40 747,20 9091,56 25442,16 3307,92 25015,63 4203,00 8844,98 22037,73 11945,86
Week 24 466,80 622,40 7573,05 21192,72 2755,42 20837,43 3501,00 7367,66 18356,91 9950,62
Week 25 560,40 747,20 9091,56 25442,16 3307,92 25015,63 4203,00 8844,98 22037,73 11945,86
Week 26 279,60 372,80 4536,04 12693,84 1650,42 12481,03 2097,00 4413,02 10995,27 5960,14
For example to calculate the week 1 in workstation assembly, it is calculated bu formula as belows.
𝑖
𝑖 𝑖 𝑦= × = , × 9 = , 𝑖
𝑦
In Module III: Capacity Planning, it is showed that available capacity is enough to fulfill the required capacity. In RCCP, it is only
check whether the gross requirement already fulfilled yet or not. In next analysis, there will be a CRP analysis, to know the detail
capacity required by MRP.
5.21
POR Calculations
In the POR Calculations, there are two types calculations, such as Setup Time and Run Time calculation. Since the lead time is same
for each period, so start with the same period. In the table below, the setup time will be inputted based on value of POR in each item
and period.
5.22
Table 4.4. Setup Time Calculation (continued)
101 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0
C 0 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0
D 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10
Total 0 22 30 22 30 22 30 22 30 22 30 22 30 22 30 22
102 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30
C 0 0 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20
D 0 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0
E 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 10 0 30 50 30 50 30 50 30 50 30 50 30 50 30 50
103 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0
C 0 0 0 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0
5.23
Table 4.4. Setup Time Calculation (continued)
104 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40
E 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10
F 0 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0
Total 0 10 10 50 10 75 10 75 10 75 10 75 10 75 10 75
105 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30
Total 0 0 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30
106 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0
Total 0 0 0 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0
5.24
Table 4.4. Setup Time Calculation (continued)
107 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15
E 0 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 15 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
108 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5.25
Table 4.4. Setup Time Calculation (continued)
Week
Part 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Assembly
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Inspection
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 0 0
C 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 0 0
101
D 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 0 0 0
Total 30 22 30 22 30 22 30 22 30 22 30 0 0 0
5.26
Table 4.4. Setup Time Calculation (continued)
102 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 0
C 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 0
D 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 0 0
E 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 30 50 30 50 30 50 30 50 30 50 20 50 0 0
103 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0
C 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0
104 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 0
E 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 0 0 0
F 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 0 0
Total 10 75 10 75 10 75 10 75 10 75 10 65 0 25
5.27
Table 4.4. Setup Time Calculation (continued)
105 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 0
Total 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 0
106 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0
Total 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0
107 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15
E 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 0 15
5.28
Table 4.4. Setup Time Calculation (continued)
108 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
After calculating the setup time, now continue to calculate the run time. It is calculated by formula as belows.
𝑖 = ℎ × ℎ / 𝑖
5.29
Table 4.5. Run Time Calculation
Week
Part -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Assembly X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Inspection X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5.30
Table 4.5. Run Time Calculation (continued)
10 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 B 0 0 1953 0 1838.3 0 2232 0 2232 0 2312.6 0 2325 0 2080.1 0
C 0 0 1315.4 0 1238.1 0 1503. 0 1503.3 0 1557.6 0 1566 0 1401.0 0
4 84 36 6 48 48
D 0 3704 0 3486. 0 4233 0 4233 0 4386. 0 441 0 3945. 0 4233
.4 84 .6 .6 48 0 48 .6
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 1890 0 1779 0 2160 0 2160 0 2238 0 225 0 2013 0 2160
0
Total 0 5594 3268.4 5265. 3076.4 6393 3735. 6393 3735.3 6624. 3870.2 666 3891 5958. 3481.1 6393
.4 4 84 84 .6 36 .6 6 48 48 0 48 48 .6
10 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 1270 0 11954. 0 14515. 0 1451 0 15039. 0 15120 0 13527. 0 14515. 0
0.8 88 2 5.2 36 36 2
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 1270 0 11954. 0 14515. 0 1451 0 15039. 0 15120 0 13527. 0 14515. 0
0.8 9 2 5.2 36 4 2
5.31
Table 4.5. Run Time Calculation (continued)
103 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 2431.3 0 2952 0 2952 0 3058.6 0 3075 0 2751.1 0
C 0 0 0 0 741.25 0 900 0 900 0 932.5 0 937.5 0 838.75 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 3172.55 0 3852 0 3852 0 3991.1 0 4012.5 0 3589.85 0
104 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 3380.1 0 4104 0 4104 0 4252.2 0 4275 0 3824.7 0 4104
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 3380.1 0 4104 0 4104 0 4252.2 0 4275 0 3824.7 0 4104
5.32
Table 4.5. Run Time Calculation (continued)
105 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 2490.6 0 3024 0 3024 0 3133.2 0 3150 0 2818.2 0 3024
Total 0 0 0 2490.6 0 3024 0 3024 0 3133.2 0 3150 0 2818.2 0 3024
106 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
107 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 6480 0 6480 0 6714 0 6750 0 6039 0 6480
E 0 0 7969.92 0 9676.8 0 9676.8 0 10026.24 0 10080 0 9018.24 0 9676.8 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 7969.92 0 9676.8 6480 9676.8 6480 10026.24 6714 10080 6750 9018.24 6039 9676.8 6480
5.33
Table 4.5. Run Time Calculation (continued)
108 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Week
Par 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 2
t 5 6
Assembly X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5.34
Table 4.5. Run Time Calculation (continued)
Inspectio X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
n B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
101 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 2232 0 1519 0 2325 0 2495.5 0 2483.1 0 2030.5 0 0 0
C 1503.3 0 1023.1 0 1566 0 1680.84 0 1672.48 0 1367.6 0 0 0
6 2 8 4
D 0 2881. 0 441 0 4733. 0 4709.8 0 3851. 0 0 0 0
2 0 4 8 4
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 1470 0 225 0 2415 0 2403 0 1965 0 0 0 0
0
Total 3735.3 4351. 2542.1 666 3891 7148. 4176.34 7112.8 4155.58 5816. 3398.1 0 0 0
6 2 2 0 4 8 8 4 4
5.35
Table 4.5. Run Time Calculation (continued)
102 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 9878.4 0 15120 0 16228. 0 16148.1 0 13204.8 0 0 0 0 0
8 6
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 9878.4 0 15120 0 16228. 0 16148.1 0 13204.8 0 0 0 0 0
8 6
103 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 2952 0 2009 0 3075 0 3300.5 0 3284.1 0 2685.5 0 0 0
C 900 0 612.5 0 937.5 0 1006.25 0 1001.25 0 818.75 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 3852 0 2621.5 0 4012.5 0 4306.75 0 4285.35 0 3504.2 0 0 0
5
5.36
Table 4.5. Run Time Calculation (continued)
104 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 2793 0 427 0 4588. 0 4565.7 0 3733. 0 0 0 0
5 5 5
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 2793 0 427 0 4588. 0 4565.7 0 3733. 0 0 0 0
5 5 5
105 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 2058 0 315 0 3381 0 3364.2 0 2751 0 0 0 0
0
Total 0 2058 0 315 0 3381 0 3364.2 0 2751 0 0 0 0
0
106 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5.37
Table 4.5. Run Time Calculation (continued)
107 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 4410 0 675 0 7245 0 7209 0 5895 0 0 0 0
0
E 6585.6 0 10080 0 10819. 0 10765.4 0 8803.2 0 0 0 0 0
2 4
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 6585.6 4410 10080 675 10819. 7245 10765.4 7209 8803.2 5895 0 0 0 0
0 2 4
108 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
After calculated the total setup and run time in each workstation and period, now sum up all to get the value of requirements capacity
as belows.
5.38
Table 4.6. Total Requirements Capacity
Work Week
Center -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Assembl 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
y
Inspectio 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
n
101 0 5616 3298.4 5287. 3106.4 6415 3765. 6415 3765.3 6646. 3900.2 66 3921 5980. 3511.1 6415
.4 4 84 84 .6 36 .6 6 48 48 82 48 48 .6
102 1271 0 11984. 50 14545. 50 1454 50 15069. 50 15150 50 13557. 50 14545. 50
0.8 88 2 5.2 36 36 2
103 0 0 0 0 3202.5 0 3882 0 3882 0 4021.1 0 4042.5 0 3619.8 0
5 5
104 0 10 10 3430. 10 4179 10 4179 10 4327. 10 43 10 3899. 10 4179
1 2 50 7
105 0 0 0 2520. 0 3054 0 3054 0 3163. 0 31 0 2848. 0 3054
6 2 80 2
106 0 0 0 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0
107 0 0 7984.9 0 9691.8 6495 9691. 6495 10041. 6729 10095 67 9033.2 6054 9691.8 6495
2 8 24 65 4
108 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5.39
Table 4.6. Total Requirements Capacity (continued)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3765.36 4373.2 2572.12 6682 3921 7170.4 4206.34 7134.88 4185.588 5838.4 3428.14 0 0 0
9908.4 50 15150 50 16258.8 50 16178.16 50 13234.8 50 20 50 0 0
3882 0 2651.5 0 4042.5 0 4336.75 0 4315.35 0 3534.25 0 30 0
10 2868 10 4350 10 4663.5 10 4640.7 10 3808.5 10 65 0 25
0 2088 0 3180 0 3411 0 3394.2 0 2781 0 30 0 0
25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0
6600.6 4425 10095 6765 10834.2 7260 10780.44 7224 8818.2 5910 15 15 0 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
After calculated the required capacity, now comparing it with available capacity. To check whether it is already fulfill the requirements
or not, below are shown the comparation between available and required capacity.
𝑦= 𝑖 𝑖 𝑦− 𝑖 𝑖𝑦
5.40
Table 4.7. Assembly Workstation
5.41
Table 4.7. Assembly Workstation (continued)
Since in all period, the available capacity fulfill all required capacity, so the status is “Covered”.
5.42
Table 4.8. Inspection Workstation
WEE Working REGULAR TIME OVER TIME TOTAL TOTAL REQUIR INVENTORY CUMMULATI STATUS
K Days WORKE HOU WORKE HOU (HOUR (MINUTE ED (MIN) VE
RS RS RS RS S) S) CAPACI INVENTORY
TY (MIN) (MIN)
-3 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600 0 3600 3600 COVER
ED
-2 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600 0 3600 7200 COVER
ED
-1 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600 0 3600 10800 COVER
ED
0 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600 0 3600 14400 COVER
ED
1 7 1 7 1 3 70 4200 0 4200 18600 COVER
ED
2 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600 0 3600 22200 COVER
ED
3 5 1 7 1 3 50 3000 0 3000 25200 COVER
ED
4 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600 0 3600 28800 COVER
ED
5 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600 0 3600 32400 COVER
ED
6 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600 0 3600 36000 COVER
ED
7 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600 0 3600 39600 COVER
ED
8 6 1 7 1 3 60 3600 0 3600 43200 COVER
ED
5.43
Table 4.8. Inspection Workstation (continued)
Since in all period, the available capacity fulfill all required capacity, so the status is “Covered”.
5.44
Table 4.9. Workstation 101
WEE Working REGULAR TIME OVER TIME TOTAL TOTAL REQUIR INVENTORY CUMMULATI STATUS
K Days WORKE HOU WORKE HOU (HOUR (MINUTE ED (MIN) VE
RS RS RS RS S) S) CAPACI INVENTORY
TY (MIN) (MIN)
-3 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 0 6120 6120 COVER
ED
-2 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 5616.4 504 6624 COVER
ED
-1 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 3298.44 2822 9445 COVER
ED
0 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 5287.84 832 10277 COVER
ED
1 7 2 7 1 3 119 7140 3106.484 4034 14311 COVER
ED
2 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 6415.6 -296 14015 COVER
ED
3 5 2 7 1 3 85 5100 3765.36 1335 15350 COVER
ED
4 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 6415.6 -296 15054 COVER
ED
5 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 3765.36 2355 17409 COVER
ED
6 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 6646.48 -526 16882 COVER
ED
7 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 3900.248 2220 19102 COVER
ED
8 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 6682 -562 18540 COVER
ED
5.45
Table 4.9. Workstation 101 (continued)
Since in all period, the available capacity fulfill all required capacity, so the status is “Covered”.
5.46
Table 4.10. Workstation 102
5.47
Table 4.10. Workstation 102 (continued)
Since in all period, the available capacity fulfill all required capacity, so the status is “Covered”.
5.48
Table 4.11. Workstation 103
5.49
Table 4.11. Workstation 103 (continued)
Since in all period, the available capacity fulfill all required capacity, so the status is “Covered”.
5.50
Table 4.12. Workstation 104
5.51
Table 4.12. Workstation 104 (continued)
Since in all period, the available capacity fulfill all required capacity, so the status is “Covered”.
5.52
Table 4.13. Workstation 105
5.53
Table 4.13. Workstation 105 (continued)
Since in all period, the available capacity fulfill all required capacity, so the status is “Covered”.
5.54
Table 4.14. Workstation 106
WEE Working REGULAR TIME OVER TIME TOTAL TOTAL REQUIR INVENTORY CUMMULATI STATUS
K Days WORKE HOU WORKE HOU (HOUR (MINUTE ED (MIN) VE
RS RS RS RS S) S) CAPACI INVENTORY
TY (MIN) (MIN)
-3 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 0 6120 6120 COVER
ED
-2 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 0 6120 12240 COVER
ED
-1 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 0 6120 18360 COVER
ED
0 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 0 6120 24480 COVER
ED
1 7 2 7 1 3 119 7140 25 7115 31595 COVER
ED
2 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 0 6120 37715 COVER
ED
3 5 2 7 1 3 85 5100 25 5075 42790 COVER
ED
4 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 0 6120 48910 COVER
ED
5 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 25 6095 55005 COVER
ED
6 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 0 6120 61125 COVER
ED
7 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 25 6095 67220 COVER
ED
8 6 2 7 1 3 102 6120 0 6120 73340 COVER
ED
5.55
Table 4.14. Workstation 106 (continued)
Since in all period, the available capacity fulfill all required capacity, so the status is “Covered”.
5.56
Table 4.15. Workstation 107
5.57
Table 4.15. Workstation 107 (continued)
Since in all period, the available capacity fulfill all required capacity, so the status is “Covered”.
5.58
Table 4.16. Workstation 108
5.59
Table 4.16. Workstation 108 (continued)
Since in all period, the available capacity fulfill all required capacity, so the status is “Covered”.
The available capacity in each workstation fulfill the required capacity, so it could be concluded that available capacity is enough for
fulfilling the required capacity.
5.60
CHAPTER V
CONCLUSION
Capacity Requirements Planning (CRP) is more detail than capacity planning and
MRP. The function is to calculate the detail capacity required by MRP. After
determining the required capacity, then calculate the available capacity. By
comparing available capacity and required capacity, it could be concluded that the
the available capacity has fulfilled the required capacity and the MPS could be used
for production planning.
5.61
REFERENCE
Fogarty, Donald W., Blackstone, John H. Jr., and Hoffman, T. R., (1991).
Production and Inventory Management. Colledge Division South-Western
Publishing Co, Cincinnati.
Sipper, D., & Bulfin. JR, R. L. (1997). Production : Planning, Control, and
Integration. New York City: McGraw Hill Education.
5.62